Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Functional Analysis

233 missions · 145 completed

Missions

Open88Completed145All233
Analysis·Captain: wurtle

Universal strong Kadison–Kastler stabilityResearch Paper

Motivation

How rigid is a von Neumann algebra inside B(H)B(H)B(H)? If two algebras M,N⊆B(H)M,N\subseteq B(H)M,N⊆B(H) have unit balls that are uniformly close, must they be the same algebra up to a small change of coordinates? Kadison and Kastler introduced the distance between the unit balls in 1972 (Amer. J. Math. 1972) and asked whether sufficiently close algebras are spatially isomorphic, implemented by a unitary close to the identity. The positive answer for a class of algebras is called (strong) Kadison–Kastler stability. The problem connects perturbation theory, Hochschild cohomology, and Kadison's similarity problem, and it was settled previously only for injective (amenable) algebras, type I algebras, and specific nonamenable examples.

This mission asks for a formal proof of the uniform strong Kadison–Kastler stability theorem stated in an OpenAI preprint dated September 23, 2026 (source): a single tolerance works for all von Neumann algebras on all Hilbert spaces. The preprint has not been peer reviewed and its claims have not been independently verified; on the platform the Lean goal is open.

Background

  • 1972 — Kadison and Kastler introduce the metric and prove stability results for type I algebras (Amer. J. Math. 1972).
  • 1974–1975 — Phillips proves spatial isomorphism for close type I algebras (Pacific J. Math. 1974); Christensen obtains a conjugating unitary near the identity (J. LMS 1975).
  • 1977 — Christensen (Invent. Math. 1977), Johnson (Proc. LMS 1977) and Raeburn–Taylor (JFA 1977) settle the injective case.
  • 1980 — Christensen's theory of near inclusions (Acta Math. 1980).
  • 1982 — Johnson's examples show that for C*-algebras the implementing unitary cannot always be chosen near the identity in a uniform way (Canad. Math. Bull. 1982).
  • 1983 — Haagerup's cyclic similarity estimate (Ann. of Math. 1983).
  • 2010–2012 — Christensen, Sinclair, Smith, White and Winter prove spatial isomorphism for close separable nuclear C*-algebras (PNAS 2010; Acta Math. 2012).
  • 2012–2014 — Cameron, Christensen, Sinclair, Smith, White and Wiggins construct the first nonamenable Kadison–Kastler stable factors, (L∞(X)⋊SLn(Z))⊗ˉR(L^\infty(X)\rtimes SL_n(\mathbb Z))\bar\otimes R(L∞(X)⋊SLn​(Z))⊗ˉ​R for n≥3n\ge3n≥3 (PNAS 2012; Duke 2014).
  • September 2026 — The OpenAI preprint claims uniform stability for all von Neumann algebras (Theorem 1.1, p. 2).

Setting

Let HHH be a complex Hilbert space and B(H)B(H)B(H) the bounded operators with the operator norm. A von Neumann algebra M⊆B(H)M\subseteq B(H)M⊆B(H) is a unital ∗*∗-subalgebra equal to its double commutant (in particular it contains the identity IHI_HIH​). Write M1={x∈M:∥x∥≤1}M_1=\{x\in M:\|x\|\le1\}M1​={x∈M:∥x∥≤1} for its unit ball. The Kadison–Kastler distance is the Hausdorff distance of unit balls,

d(M,N)=max⁡(sup⁡x∈M1inf⁡y∈N1∥x−y∥, sup⁡y∈N1inf⁡x∈M1∥x−y∥).d(M,N)=\max\Bigl(\sup_{x\in M_1}\inf_{y\in N_1}\|x-y\|,\ \sup_{y\in N_1}\inf_{x\in M_1}\|x-y\|\Bigr).d(M,N)=max(x∈M1​sup​y∈N1​inf​∥x−y∥, y∈N1​sup​x∈M1​inf​∥x−y∥).

A unitary u∈B(H)u\in B(H)u∈B(H) conjugates MMM to NNN if uMu∗=NuMu^*=NuMu∗=N.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.1 (p. 2)

For every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there is δ>0\delta>0δ>0 such that for every complex Hilbert space HHH and all von Neumann algebras M,N⊆B(H)M,N\subseteq B(H)M,N⊆B(H) with d(M,N)<δd(M,N)<\deltad(M,N)<δ, there is a unitary u∈B(H)u\in B(H)u∈B(H) with

uMu∗=Nand∥u−IH∥<ε.uMu^*=N\qquad\text{and}\qquad\|u-I_H\|<\varepsilon .uMu∗=Nand∥u−IH​∥<ε.

The tolerance δ\deltaδ depends only on ε\varepsilonε: not on the algebras, their type, their representations, or the size of HHH.

Significance

The result itself. It answers the Kadison–Kastler perturbation question in its strongest uniform form for von Neumann algebras, including all nonamenable and type III cases and non-separable Hilbert spaces. Consequences include that every algebraic or analytic invariant preserved by unitary conjugacy (type, factoriality, property Γ\GammaΓ, Cartan subalgebras) is locally constant in the Kadison–Kastler metric. The analogous C*-algebra statement fails in its uniform-unitary form by Johnson's examples, so the theorem is specific to von Neumann algebras.

Formalizing it. The statement uses only Mathlib's VonNeumannAlgebra, unitary operators and Hausdorff distance, so it is fully expressible today. The proof, however, draws on free probability, tracial ultraproducts, Tomita–Takesaki theory, crossed products, Poisson boundaries and measurable cocycles, most of which are absent from Mathlib. Formalizing even the amenable (injective) case would be a substantial reusable contribution.

Difficulty

Closeness of unit balls supplies nearby elements but no linear or multiplicative correspondence between the algebras, and it gives no control at matrix levels, where perturbation arguments naturally live. For nonamenable algebras the classical route through vanishing Hochschild cohomology is unavailable. The preprint proceeds by cases. For finite factors it proves a uniform bound on all matrix amplifications of commutator maps (Theorem 3.1, p. 11) and corrects nearby unitaries to a measurable cocycle over an amenable boundary action (Section 4). Infinite factors require comparing modular groups through Tomita graphs (Proposition 6.5, p. 41) and aligning the modular action (Proposition 7.1, p. 45) before passing to crossed products (Theorem 8.4, p. 59). General algebras then require aligning centers and passing from separable to arbitrary Hilbert spaces (Section 9) without losing uniformity.

Formalization scope

  • HHH ranges over complex Hilbert spaces (NormedAddCommGroup, InnerProductSpace ℂ, CompleteSpace) in a fixed universe u; δ\deltaδ is chosen before HHH, so the uniformity over Hilbert spaces is part of the statement.
  • VonNeumannAlgebra H is Mathlib's notion; these algebras contain the identity, so "unital with identity IHI_HIH​" is built in.
  • kkDistance M N is Metric.hausdorffDist of the closed unit balls. Both balls contain 000 and are bounded, so the Hausdorff distance is finite and the definition is exactly (1.1).
  • NearConjugacy M N ε asks for a unitary vvv with v M v∗=Nv\,M\,v^*=NvMv∗=N as sets and ∥v−1∥<ε\|v-1\|<\varepsilon∥v−1∥<ε.
  • There is no trivializing reading: the hypotheses are satisfied by M=NM=NM=N, and the conclusion is nontrivial for M≠NM\neq NM=N.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Universal strong Kadison–Kastler stability, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 23, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Universal-strong-Kadison-Kastler-stability-September-23-2026/paper.pdf
  • R. V. Kadison, D. Kastler, Perturbations of von Neumann algebras. I. Stability of type, Amer. J. Math. 94 (1972). https://doi.org/10.2307/2373592
  • E. Christensen, Perturbations of type I von Neumann algebras, J. London Math. Soc. (1975). https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s2-9.3.395
  • E. Christensen, Perturbation of operator algebras, Invent. Math. 43 (1977). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01390201
  • B. E. Johnson, Perturbations of Banach algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. (1977). https://doi.org/10.1112/plms/s3-34.3.439
  • I. Raeburn, J. L. Taylor, Hochschild cohomology and perturbations of Banach algebras, J. Funct. Anal. (1977). https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-1236(77)90072-6
  • E. Christensen, Near inclusions of C-algebras*, Acta Math. 144 (1980). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02392125
  • B. E. Johnson, A counterexample in the perturbation theory of C-algebras*, Canad. Math. Bull. 25 (1982). https://doi.org/10.4153/CMB-1982-043-4
  • U. Haagerup, Solution of the similarity problem for cyclic representations of C-algebras*, Ann. of Math. 118 (1983). https://doi.org/10.2307/2007028
  • E. Christensen, A. M. Sinclair, R. R. Smith, S. A. White, W. Winter, Perturbations of nuclear C-algebras*, Acta Math. 208 (2012). https://doi.org/10.1007/s11511-012-0075-5
  • J. Cameron, E. Christensen, A. M. Sinclair, R. R. Smith, S. A. White, A. D. Wiggins, Kadison–Kastler stable factors, Duke Math. J. 163 (2014). https://doi.org/10.1215/00127094-2819736
2 thms1 active userReviewed
Mathematical PhysicsProbability·Captain: wurtle

Ground-state condensation in the dilute hard-sphere gasResearch Paper

Motivation

Bose–Einstein condensation (BEC) means that a single one-particle state carries a macroscopic fraction of a many-boson system. It was predicted for the ideal gas by Bose and Einstein (1924–1925) and is observed in dilute atomic gases, but for interacting particles in the thermodynamic limit there was no rigorous proof, even in the ground state. The Penrose–Onsager criterion (Phys. Rev. 1956) identifies condensation with a macroscopic eigenvalue of the one-particle density matrix. Energy asymptotics of the dilute gas are now known to second order, but they do not determine single-orbital occupation, since the one-particle spectral gap closes as the volume grows. Lieb and Yngvason explicitly separated the condensation question from their energy theorem, and Solovej's 2025 survey lists fixed-density ground-state condensation as a major problem in the field (C. R. Physique 2025, Section 5).

This mission asks for a formal proof of ground-state condensation for the dilute three-dimensional hard-sphere Bose gas, as stated in an OpenAI preprint dated September 24, 2026 (source). The preprint has not been peer reviewed and its claims have not been independently verified; on the platform the Lean goal is open.

Background

  • 1924–1925 — Bose and Einstein predict condensation in the ideal Bose gas (Z. Phys. 1924).
  • 1947 — Bogoliubov's theory assumes a macroscopically occupied zero mode.
  • 1956 — Penrose and Onsager's density-matrix criterion for condensation.
  • 1957 — Dyson's bounds on the hard-sphere ground-state energy (Phys. Rev. 1957); Lee, Huang and Yang predict depletion of order ρa3\sqrt{\rho a^3}ρa3​ (Phys. Rev. 1957).
  • 1998 — Lieb and Yngvason prove the leading dilute energy asymptotics 4πρa4\pi\rho a4πρa (PRL 1998).
  • 2002 — Lieb and Seiringer prove BEC for trapped gases in the Gross–Pitaevskii limit (PRL 2002).
  • 2020 — Deuchert and Seiringer: homogeneous Gross–Pitaevskii limit at positive temperature (ARMA 2020).
  • 2021–2026 — Fournais's length scales for BEC (EMS 2021); Fournais–Solovej's Lee–Huang–Yang lower bound including hard cores (Invent. Math. 2023); Basti et al.'s matching upper bound for hard spheres (arXiv:2603.13084); results of Chong–Liang–Nam (JFA 2026) and Junge (arXiv:2603.20776) in joint dilute and large-volume limits.
  • September 2026 — The OpenAI preprint claims condensation at fixed density and fixed exclusion distance (Theorem 1.1, p. 3).

Setting

Let ΛL=(R/LZ)3\Lambda_L=(\mathbb R/L\mathbb Z)^3ΛL​=(R/LZ)3 be the flat torus with torus distance dLd_LdL​. For NNN particles and exclusion distance a>0a>0a>0, the allowed configurations are

ΩN,L,a={X∈ΛLN: dL(xi,xj)>a for i<j}.\Omega_{N,L,a}=\{X\in\Lambda_L^N:\ d_L(x_i,x_j)>a\ \text{for } i<j\}.ΩN,L,a​={X∈ΛLN​: dL​(xi​,xj​)>a for i<j}.

The hard-sphere Hamiltonian is the operator of the Dirichlet form q[f]=∑i=1N∫∣∇if∣2q[f]=\sum_{i=1}^N\int|\nabla_if|^2q[f]=∑i=1N​∫∣∇i​f∣2 on H01(ΩN,L,a)H^1_0(\Omega_{N,L,a})H01​(ΩN,L,a​) restricted to symmetric (bosonic) functions; wave functions vanish on forbidden configurations, and aaa is the scattering length. A ground vector is a normalized bosonic minimizer of qqq. For a normalized bosonic Ψ\PsiΨ, the condensate fraction in the constant orbital φ0=L−3/2\varphi_0=L^{-3/2}φ0​=L−3/2 is

B(Ψ)=⟨φ0,ΓΨ(1)φ0⟩N=1L3∫ΛLN−1∣∫ΛLΨ(x,Y) dx∣2dY∈[0,1],B(\Psi)=\frac{\langle\varphi_0,\Gamma^{(1)}_\Psi\varphi_0\rangle}{N}=\frac1{L^3}\int_{\Lambda_L^{N-1}}\Bigl|\int_{\Lambda_L}\Psi(x,Y)\,dx\Bigr|^2dY\in[0,1],B(Ψ)=N⟨φ0​,ΓΨ(1)​φ0​⟩​=L31​∫ΛLN−1​​​∫ΛL​​Ψ(x,Y)dx​2dY∈[0,1],

and for a density operator it is defined by linearity. The gas parameter is ρa3\rho a^3ρa3 with ρ\rhoρ the density.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.1 and Corollary 1.2 (p. 3)

There are absolute constants ε0,c0>0\varepsilon_0,c_0>0ε0​,c0​>0 such that, for all a,ρ>0a,\rho>0a,ρ>0 with ρa3<ε0\rho a^3<\varepsilon_0ρa3<ε0​ and every sequence Nk→∞N_k\to\inftyNk​→∞, Lk→∞L_k\to\inftyLk​→∞ with Nk/Lk3→ρN_k/L_k^3\to\rhoNk​/Lk3​→ρ:

  1. for every choice of (possibly complex) bosonic ground vectors Ψk\Psi_kΨk​,  lim inf⁡kB(Ψk)≥c0\ \liminf_k B(\Psi_k)\ge c_0 liminfk​B(Ψk​)≥c0​;
  2. for every sequence of density operators TkT_kTk​ supported on the bosonic ground spaces, the same bound holds for the occupation of TkT_kTk​ (in particular for the normalized ground-space projections).

The constant c0c_0c0​ does not depend on the gas parameter in this range.

Significance

The result itself. It is a proof of macroscopic condensation in an interacting continuum Bose gas with fixed density and fixed hard core, in the thermodynamic limit, uniformly over all ground states including degenerate ground spaces. Previous rigorous results let the gas parameter tend to zero with the volume, or concerned traps, scaling limits, or positive-temperature settings with different potentials. The theorem gives a positive fraction only; it does not reach the Lee–Huang–Yang depletion law.

Formalizing it. The statement involves Sobolev spaces with Dirichlet conditions on a configuration space of the torus, bosonic symmetry, density operators, and partial traces, none of which are packaged in Mathlib; the Lean development builds them concretely. The proof uses killed Brownian motion, percolation-type path constructions, and second-moment arguments. No machine-checked statement of BEC for an interacting system is known.

Difficulty

Energy estimates alone cannot detect occupation of the constant orbital, because the cost of moving particles out of it is of order L−2L^{-2}L−2 per particle and vanishes in the limit. One must show directly that a typical ground state correlates distant parts of the box. The preprint compares a tagged particle's position in distant cells by moving trajectories along random lattice routes; multiplying local comparison costs along a route loses a factor at every step, so instead it averages over random routes and bounds the second moment of the averaged likelihood, where exact cancellation of normalizers leaves a cost depending only on mutual encounters of two routes (Introduction, pp. 4–5; Section 8). A separate phase argument passes from ∣Ψ∣|\Psi|∣Ψ∣ to complex Ψ\PsiΨ (Lemma 2.3, p. 9).

Formalization scope

  • Configurations are Fin N → Fin 3 → AddCircle L; the allowed set uses the Euclidean torus distance with strict inequality a < dist.
  • The form domain dirichletDomain is the closure, in L2×(L2)3NL^2\times(L^2)^{3N}L2×(L2)3N, of jets of smooth compactly supported test functions with support in the allowed set; energy is the sum of squared L2L^2L2 norms of the partial derivatives. IsGroundVector means: in the domain, bosonic (a.e. permutation invariant), normalized, and of minimal energy among such vectors.
  • occupation is exactly B(Ψ)B(\Psi)B(Ψ); mixedOccupation T is the trace of TTT compressed by the bounded map Ψ↦L−3/2∫Ψ(x,⋅) dx\Psi\mapsto L^{-3/2}\int\Psi(x,\cdot)\,dxΨ↦L−3/2∫Ψ(x,⋅)dx. GroundSupported T says every unit vector in (ker⁡T)⊥(\ker T)^\perp(kerT)⊥ is (the first component of) a ground vector.
  • Density operators are positive bounded operators with trace one, computed in a fixed Hilbert basis.
  • Hypotheses on the sequences are only those of the source; the ground-vector hypothesis is required for every index kkk, which loses nothing since lim inf⁡\liminfliminf depends only on tails.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Ground-state condensation in the dilute hard-sphere gas, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 24, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Ground-state-condensation-in-the-dilute-hard-sphere-gas-September-24-2026/paper.pdf
  • O. Penrose, L. Onsager, Bose–Einstein condensation and liquid helium, Phys. Rev. 104 (1956). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.104.576
  • F. J. Dyson, Ground-state energy of a hard-sphere gas, Phys. Rev. 106 (1957). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.106.20
  • T. D. Lee, K. Huang, C. N. Yang, Eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of a Bose system of hard spheres and its low-temperature properties, Phys. Rev. 106 (1957). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.106.1135
  • E. H. Lieb, J. Yngvason, Ground state energy of the low density Bose gas, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 (1998). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRevLett.80.2504
  • E. H. Lieb, R. Seiringer, Proof of Bose–Einstein condensation for dilute trapped gases, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 (2002). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRevLett.88.170409
  • S. Fournais, J. P. Solovej, The energy of dilute Bose gases II: the general case, Invent. Math. (2023). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00222-022-01175-0
  • A. Deuchert, R. Seiringer, Gross–Pitaevskii limit of a homogeneous Bose gas at positive temperature, Arch. Ration. Mech. Anal. (2020). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00205-020-01489-4
  • J. P. Solovej, Mathematical physics of dilute Bose gases, C. R. Physique (2025). https://doi.org/10.5802/crphys.247
  • G. Basti, M. Brooks, S. Cenatiempo, A. Olgiati, B. Schlein, The Lee–Huang–Yang energy for a dilute gas of hard spheres: an upper bound, arXiv:2603.13084 (2026). https://arxiv.org/abs/2603.13084v2
2 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamical SystemsHarmonic Analysis·Captain: wurtle

A smooth three-torus diffeomorphism with simple Lebesgue spectrumResearch Paper

Motivation: Banach's simple Lebesgue-spectrum problem

A measure-preserving transformation TTT of a probability space acts on square-integrable functions by the Koopman operator UTg=g∘TU_Tg=g\circ TUT​g=g∘T, a unitary operator. Its spectral type (discrete, singular continuous, absolutely continuous) and its multiplicity are basic invariants of ergodic theory. The Lebesgue spectrum is the spectral type of the shift on ℓ2(Z)\ell^2(\mathbb Z)ℓ2(Z), the type of Bernoulli shifts and other strongly chaotic systems, where it occurs with infinite multiplicity. Banach's problem asks whether Lebesgue spectrum can occur with multiplicity one: is there a transformation whose Koopman operator on the orthogonal complement of the constants is unitarily equivalent to multiplication by www on L2(S1)L^2(S^1)L2(S1)? Equivalently, is there a single function whose bilateral orbit under UTU_TUT​ is an orthonormal basis of the mean-zero space? The problem combines spectral theory with the construction of explicit dynamics, and a smooth example would show this spectral behavior is compatible with the regularity of differentiable dynamics.

Timeline

  • 1949 — Rokhlin asks for ergodic automorphisms with simple, or at least finite-multiplicity, Lebesgue spectrum (Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 1949, §4, no. 7).
  • 1960 — Ulam records a real-line form of the question attributed to Banach (A Collection of Mathematical Problems, Interscience, 1960, §6, p. 76).
  • 1970 — Anosov and Katok introduce approximation-by-conjugation constructions of smooth ergodic diffeomorphisms (Trudy MMO 1970).
  • 1978 — Helson and Parry construct cocycles over aperiodic transformations with associated Lebesgue spectrum (Ark. Mat. 1978).
  • 1984 — Mathew and Nadkarni construct a transformation with a Lebesgue component of multiplicity two (Bull. LMS 1984).
  • 1999 — Guenais connects Morse cocycles with flat polynomials and constructs a group action with simple spectrum of mixed type (ETDS 1999).
  • 2001 — Fayad constructs C∞C^\inftyC∞ volume-preserving torus diffeomorphisms with simple (not Lebesgue) spectrum (J. LMS 2001).
  • 2020–2023 — Prikhod'ko constructs a finite-measure flow with simple Lebesgue spectrum (Sb. Math. 2020); Fayad–Forni–Kanigowski (JAMS 2021) and Abdedou–Fayad–Kessi (DCDS 2023) obtain smooth flows with countable Lebesgue multiplicity; el Abdalaoui presents an infinite-measure conservative example (arXiv:1508.06439). None of these gives a probability-preserving map with simple Lebesgue spectrum on the whole mean-zero space.
  • 2026 — The OpenAI preprint A smooth three-torus diffeomorphism with simple Lebesgue spectrum (OpenAI Math Release, September 23, 2026) claims a C∞C^\inftyC∞ volume-preserving diffeomorphism of T3\mathbb T^3T3 with this property. It has not been peer reviewed and its theorem is not formally verified.

Setting

Let T=R/Z\mathbb T=\mathbb R/\mathbb ZT=R/Z and let μ\muμ be normalized Lebesgue (Haar) measure on T3\mathbb T^3T3. A bijection T:T3→T3T:\mathbb T^3\to\mathbb T^3T:T3→T3 is a C∞C^\inftyC∞ diffeomorphism if TTT and T−1T^{-1}T−1 lift locally to C∞C^\inftyC∞ maps of R3\mathbb R^3R3. It is volume preserving if μ(T−1A)=μ(A)\mu(T^{-1}A)=\mu(A)μ(T−1A)=μ(A) for every measurable AAA. Let L02(T3,μ)L^2_0(\mathbb T^3,\mu)L02​(T3,μ) be the closed subspace of complex square-integrable functions with integral zero, and UTg=g∘TU_Tg=g\circ TUT​g=g∘T. Let mmm be Haar measure on the circle and w(z)=e2πizw(z)=e^{2\pi i z}w(z)=e2πiz the first Fourier character.

In Lean (namespace OAI.ThreeTorus), the torus is Fin 3 → UnitAddCircle with the product Haar measure, smoothness is local smooth lifting on Fin 3 → ℝ, L02L^2_0L02​ is the subspace meanZero of Lp ℂ 2 μ, and MainConclusion packages the theorem below.

Formalization targets

Goal: smooth simple Lebesgue spectrum (Theorem 1.1)

There exist a C∞C^\inftyC∞ volume-preserving diffeomorphism TTT of T3\mathbb T^3T3 and a real-valued f∈L02(T3,μ)f\in L^2_0(\mathbb T^3,\mu)f∈L02​(T3,μ) such that

{ f∘Tn:n∈Z } is an orthonormal basis of L02(T3,μ);\{\,f\circ T^n : n\in\mathbb Z\,\}\ \text{is an orthonormal basis of } L^2_0(\mathbb T^3,\mu);{f∘Tn:n∈Z} is an orthonormal basis of L02​(T3,μ);

moreover TTT is ergodic, and there is a unitary W:L02(T3,μ)→L2(S1,m)W:L^2_0(\mathbb T^3,\mu)\to L^2(S^1,m)W:L02​(T3,μ)→L2(S1,m) with

W(g∘T)=w⋅W(g)for all g∈L02.W(g\circ T)=w\cdot W(g)\qquad\text{for all } g\in L^2_0 .W(g∘T)=w⋅W(g)for all g∈L02​.

The goal is published on the platform with status Open.

Significance

The result itself. The theorem answers the probability-preserving form of Banach's problem, with the strongest kind of example: the invariant measure is the standard smooth volume on a compact manifold, the map is C∞C^\inftyC∞, and the conclusion covers the whole mean-zero space, both spectral type and multiplicity. Earlier work produced Lebesgue components, Lebesgue spectrum of higher multiplicity, simple spectrum of other types, flows, or infinite-measure examples; time-ttt maps of simple-Lebesgue flows have infinite multiplicity, so they do not answer the question. The source also derives from it mixing (of all orders, using a separate companion multiple-mixing theorem), zero Kolmogorov–Sinai entropy (via Rokhlin's finite-multiplicity entropy theorem) and vanishing Lyapunov exponents (Corollary 6.1, p. 28).

Formalizing it. The statement exercises Mathlib's LpL^pLp spaces, Haar measure on the additive circle, ergodicity and Fourier characters together. A formal proof would certify a long quantitative construction (successive smooth passages, stationary-phase estimates, Fourier signals) whose convergence must be checked simultaneously in the C∞C^\inftyC∞ topology and in spectral norms.

Difficulty

Smooth constructions by successive conjugation (Anosov–Katok type) naturally produce maps with singular or discrete spectral behavior, because each approximating map is close to a rotation or an integrable twist with pure point or very structured spectrum. Lebesgue spectral type requires the spectral measure of every function to be absolutely continuous with the right density, and simplicity requires a single orbit to span the whole space. Making both hold in the limit, while keeping the limit map C∞C^\inftyC∞, requires controlling spectral densities at every scale and approximating every target function by translates of one fixed vector — the step where generic perturbation arguments give no control.

Formalization scope

  • The torus is Fin 3 → UnitAddCircle with Measure.pi of AddCircle.haarAddCircle; TTT is an Equiv.Perm with Smooth T and Smooth T.symm (local C∞C^\inftyC∞ lifts), and MeasurePreserving T μ μ.
  • L02L^2_0L02​ is the complex subspace of Lp ℂ 2 μ with zero integral; fff is real-valued almost everywhere. The orbit vn=f∘Tnv_n=f\circ T^nvn​=f∘Tn is required to be orthonormal with dense span, i.e. a Hilbert basis indexed by Z\mathbb ZZ.
  • The spectral model is stated with an explicit linear isometric equivalence W : H₀ ≃ₗᵢ[ℂ] CircleH intertwining composition with TTT and multiplication by fourier 1. Ergodicity is Mathlib's Ergodic T μ.
  • Mixing, zero entropy and Lyapunov exponents (Section 6) are not part of the goal.
  • Needed infrastructure: stationary-phase estimates, spectral measures of Koopman operators, smooth volume-preserving changes of coordinates on the torus. Spectral-theory infrastructure for Koopman operators is reusable throughout ergodic theory.

Selected references

  • V. A. Rokhlin, Selected topics from the metric theory of dynamical systems, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 4 (1949). https://www.mathnet.ru/eng/rm8607
  • S. M. Ulam, A Collection of Mathematical Problems, Interscience Tracts in Pure and Applied Mathematics 8, 1960.
  • D. V. Anosov and A. B. Katok, New examples in smooth ergodic theory. Ergodic diffeomorphisms, Trudy Moskov. Mat. Obshch. 23 (1970). https://www.mathnet.ru/eng/mmo237
  • H. Helson and W. Parry, Cocycles and spectra, Ark. Mat. 16 (1978). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02385994
  • J. Mathew and M. G. Nadkarni, A measure preserving transformation whose spectrum has Lebesgue component of multiplicity two, Bull. London Math. Soc. 16 (1984). https://doi.org/10.1112/blms/16.4.402
  • M. Guenais, Morse cocycles and simple Lebesgue spectrum, Ergodic Theory Dynam. Systems 19 (1999). https://doi.org/10.1017/S0143385799126579
  • B. R. Fayad, Partially mixing and locally rank one smooth transformations and flows on the torus Td\mathbb T^dTd, d≥3d\ge3d≥3, J. London Math. Soc. 64 (2001). https://doi.org/10.1112/S0024610701002447
  • A. A. Prikhod'ko, On ergodic flows with simple Lebesgue spectrum, Sb. Math. 211 (2020). https://doi.org/10.1070/SM8147
  • B. Fayad, G. Forni and A. Kanigowski, Lebesgue spectrum of countable multiplicity for conservative flows on the torus, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 34 (2021). https://doi.org/10.1090/jams/970
  • OpenAI, A smooth three-torus diffeomorphism with simple Lebesgue spectrum, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 23, 2026 (Theorem 1.1, p. 1). https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/A-smooth-three-torus-diffeomorphism-with-simple-Lebesgue-spectrum-September-23-2026/paper.pdf
2 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: wurtle

Edit Distance in l1: Matching Bounds up to Constants in the ExponentResearch Paper

Motivation

Edit distance ED(x,y)\mathrm{ED}(x,y)ED(x,y) is the least number of single-symbol insertions, deletions and substitutions transforming a string xxx into yyy. It is the basic similarity measure for strings, but it is expensive to compute and awkward to index. A standard way around this is to embed strings into ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ so that ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ distances approximate edit distances; the quality of such a map is its distortion. Low-distortion embeddings give fast approximate nearest-neighbour search and sketching for edit distance, so the best possible distortion has been studied for two decades.

This preprint determines the exponential scale of the optimal distortion: for strings of length at most ddd, it is exp⁡(Θ(log⁡d log⁡log⁡d))\exp(\Theta(\sqrt{\log d\,\log\log d}))exp(Θ(logdloglogd​)), uniformly over finite alphabets.

Background

  • 1966. Levenshtein studies codes correcting insertions, deletions and substitutions.
  • 1974. Wagner and Fischer describe edit scripts through increasing traces (alignments).
  • 1995. Linial, London and Rabinovich develop the geometry of finite metric embeddings into ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​.
  • 2003. Andoni, Deza, Gupta, Indyk and Raskhodnikova give binary subsets with ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ distortion approaching 3/23/23/2.
  • 2006. Khot and Naor prove an Ω(log⁡d/log⁡log⁡d)\Omega(\sqrt{\log d/\log\log d})Ω(logd/loglogd​) lower bound via cuts and Fourier analysis of noisy shifts.
  • 2007. Ostrovsky and Rabani prove the upper bound exp⁡(O(log⁡dlog⁡log⁡d))\exp(O(\sqrt{\log d\log\log d}))exp(O(logdloglogd​)) for binary strings of length ddd.
  • 2009. Krauthgamer and Rabani prove an Ω(log⁡d)\Omega(\log d)Ω(logd) lower bound for binary strings of length ddd.
  • 2026. The OpenAI preprint Edit Distance in ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​: Matching Bounds up to Constants in the Exponent (dated September 27, 2026) proves a matching lower bound exp⁡(Ω(log⁡dlog⁡log⁡d))\exp(\Omega(\sqrt{\log d\log\log d}))exp(Ω(logdloglogd​)). It has not been peer reviewed; the Lean goal is open on this platform.

Setting

For a finite alphabet Σ\SigmaΣ and d≥1d \ge 1d≥1, let Σ≤d\Sigma^{\le d}Σ≤d be the set of strings of length at most ddd, including the empty string. Edit scripts may pass through strings of any length. Let ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ be the space of absolutely summable real sequences. Define

EΣ(d)=inf⁡f:Σ≤d↪ℓ1(max⁡x≠y∥f(x)−f(y)∥1ED(x,y))(max⁡x≠yED(x,y)∥f(x)−f(y)∥1),E_\Sigma(d) = \inf_{f:\Sigma^{\le d}\hookrightarrow \ell_1}\Big(\max_{x\ne y}\frac{\|f(x)-f(y)\|_1}{\mathrm{ED}(x,y)}\Big)\Big(\max_{x\ne y}\frac{\mathrm{ED}(x,y)}{\|f(x)-f(y)\|_1}\Big),EΣ​(d)=f:Σ≤d↪ℓ1​inf​(x=ymax​ED(x,y)∥f(x)−f(y)∥1​​)(x=ymax​∥f(x)−f(y)∥1​ED(x,y)​),

the infimum over injective maps with no restriction on dimension or computability.

In Lean (OAI.EditDistortion), edit x y is the least length of a Script true n x y of unit insertions, deletions and substitutions on List Alpha; L1 = lp (fun _ : ℕ => ℝ) 1; distortion ρ f is the product of the two maximal ratios for an embedding f : X ↪ L1; leastDistortion is the infimum over embeddings; E Alpha d applies this to {x : List Alpha // x.length ≤ d}; exponentScale c d = exp(c·sqrt(log d · log log d)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.1

There are absolute c,C>0c, C > 0c,C>0 and d0d_0d0​ such that for every d≥d0d \ge d_0d≥d0​ and every finite alphabet with ∣Σ∣≥2|\Sigma| \ge 2∣Σ∣≥2,

exp⁡(clog⁡d log⁡log⁡d)≤EΣ(d)≤exp⁡(Clog⁡d log⁡log⁡d).\exp\big(c\sqrt{\log d\,\log\log d}\big) \le E_\Sigma(d) \le \exp\big(C\sqrt{\log d\,\log\log d}\big).exp(clogdloglogd​)≤EΣ​(d)≤exp(Clogdloglogd​).

The lower bound is witnessed by a finite set of binary strings of one common length at most ddd, and the same two bounds hold for sup⁡2≤∣Σ∣<∞EΣ(d)\sup_{2 \le |\Sigma| < \infty} E_\Sigma(d)sup2≤∣Σ∣<∞​EΣ​(d).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.1 shows that the Ostrovsky–Rabani embedding is optimal up to the constant in the exponent, closing the gap between Ω(log⁡d)\Omega(\log d)Ω(logd) (Krauthgamer–Rabani) and exp⁡(O(log⁡dlog⁡log⁡d))\exp(O(\sqrt{\log d\log\log d}))exp(O(logdloglogd​)). It rules out any ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ embedding of edit distance with distortion exp⁡(o(log⁡dlog⁡log⁡d))\exp(o(\sqrt{\log d\log\log d}))exp(o(logdloglogd​)), which limits ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-based approaches to approximate edit-distance search.

Formalizing it. No machine-checked proof exists; the source is an unrefereed preprint. The upper bound relies on Ostrovsky and Rabani's fixed-length theorem (Theorem 5.1 in the preprint, taken from the literature) plus reductions proved in the preprint, so a full formalization also requires formalizing the Ostrovsky–Rabani embedding. The lower bound (Sections 2–4) is the new contribution.

Difficulty

Any lower bound must control every alignment of two strings, including matchings that cross the boundaries of the blocks used to build them, because an insertion or deletion shifts an entire suffix. Earlier Fourier-analytic arguments (Khot–Naor) and recursive constructions (Krauthgamer–Rabani) lose too much to reach the log⁡dlog⁡log⁡d\sqrt{\log d\log\log d}logdloglogd​ exponent; reaching it requires a construction whose combinatorial separation and an ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ displacement inequality match at that scale.

Formalization scope

  • Strings are List Alpha with Fintype Alpha, 2 ≤ card Alpha; the domain includes the empty string and all lengths up to ddd.
  • Edit distance includes substitutions; edit is an sInf over script lengths, which is attained since scripts always exist.
  • distortion uses sSup over finitely many ratios (the domain is finite), so no default values arise; leastDistortion is sInf over all injective maps into ℓ1(N)\ell_1(\mathbb{N})ℓ1​(N).
  • BinaryWitness c d asks for a finite nonempty set of Boolean lists of common length n≤dn \le dn≤d whose least distortion is at least exponentScale c d; a singleton has least distortion 000, so the witness must be nontrivial.

The statement cannot be met trivially: both bounds are required with constants uniform in the alphabet.

Needed infrastructure: cut decompositions of finite ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ metrics, Fourier analysis on finite abelian groups, prime-number estimates (Rosser–Schoenfeld), and the Ostrovsky–Rabani construction. Contributions toward the displacement inequality (Proposition 2.2) or the recursive construction (Proposition 3.1) are welcome.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Edit Distance in ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​: Matching Bounds up to Constants in the Exponent, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 27, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Edit-Distance-in-l1-Matching-Bounds-up-to-Constants-in-the-Exponent-September-27-2026/paper.pdf
  • R. Ostrovsky, Y. Rabani, Low distortion embeddings for edit distance, J. ACM 54(5), Article 23, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1145/1284320.1284322
  • R. Krauthgamer, Y. Rabani, Improved lower bounds for embeddings into L1L_1L1​, SIAM J. Comput. 38(6), 2009.
  • S. Khot, A. Naor, Nonembeddability theorems via Fourier analysis, Math. Ann. 334(4), 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00208-005-0745-0
  • A. Andoni, M. Deza, A. Gupta, P. Indyk, S. Raskhodnikova, Lower bounds for embedding edit distance into normed spaces, SODA 2003.
  • N. Linial, E. London, Y. Rabinovich, The geometry of graphs and some of its algorithmic applications, Combinatorica 15(2), 1995. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01200757
  • V. I. Levenshtein, Binary codes capable of correcting deletions, insertions, and reversals, Soviet Physics Doklady 10(8), 1966.
  • R. A. Wagner, M. J. Fischer, The string-to-string correction problem, J. ACM 21(1), 1974. https://doi.org/10.1145/321796.321811
2 thms1 active userReviewed
Discrete Geometry·Captain: wurtle

The Mahler Conjecture for General Convex BodiesResearch Paper

Motivation

The volume product of a convex body measures how large a body and its polar can simultaneously be. For a body without a distinguished centre, the polar is taken about the point that makes it smallest, the Santaló point, so the product is invariant under all invertible affine maps. The Blaschke–Santaló inequality identifies ellipsoids as the maximizers. Mahler's conjecture for general convex bodies asks for the minimizers and predicts simplices, with minimum value (n+1)n+1/(n!)2(n+1)^{n+1}/(n!)^2(n+1)n+1/(n!)2. The question arose from Mahler's work on polarity and the geometry of numbers, and it is the sharp form of the Bourgain–Milman reverse Santaló inequality.

This mission asks for a formal proof of the general Mahler conjecture with its equality case, as stated in an OpenAI preprint dated September 22, 2026 (source). The preprint has not been peer reviewed and its claims have not been independently verified; on the platform the Lean goal is open.

Timeline

  • 1938–1939 — Mahler proves the planar inequality among polygons with triangles as equality cases (Ein Minimalproblem für konvexe Polygone, Mathematica (Zutphen) B, 1938) and formulates the higher-dimensional problem (Časopis 1939).
  • 1949 — Santaló's affine invariant and the centre now named after him (Portugaliae Math., 1949).
  • 1987 — Bourgain and Milman prove an inverse Santaló inequality with an exponential constant (Invent. Math. 1987).
  • 1991 — Meyer completes the planar case for arbitrary convex bodies: triangles are exactly the minimizers (Monatsh. Math. 1991).
  • 2006 — Meyer and Reisner use shadow systems to prove the sharp inequality for polytopes with at most n+3n+3n+3 vertices (Mathematika 2006).
  • 2008–2012 — Kuperberg's explicit lower bounds via Gauss linking integrals (GAFA 2008); Nazarov's complex-analytic proof of Bourgain–Milman (GAFA seminar 2012).
  • 2011 — Kim and Reisner prove strict local minimality at every simplex (Mathematika 2011).
  • 2018 — Klartag's cone/Laplace-transform formulation of Mahler volumes (Adv. Math. 2018).
  • 2024 — Mastrantonis and Rubinstein extend Nazarov's method to nonsymmetric bodies (arXiv:2206.06188).
  • 2026 — Chen, Li, Xi and Xu prove the three-dimensional general case with tetrahedra as minimizers (arXiv:2605.09334).
  • September 2026 — The OpenAI preprint claims the general conjecture in every dimension (Theorem 1.1, p. 1).

Setting

A convex body K⊂RnK\subset\mathbb R^nK⊂Rn is a compact convex set with nonempty interior; ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ is Lebesgue measure and ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ the Euclidean inner product. For an interior point zzz, the polar of KKK about zzz is

(K−z)∘={y∈Rn: ⟨y,x−z⟩≤1 for all x∈K},(K-z)^\circ=\{y\in\mathbb R^n:\ \langle y,x-z\rangle\le1\ \text{for all }x\in K\},(K−z)∘={y∈Rn: ⟨y,x−z⟩≤1 for all x∈K},

and the volume product is

P(K)=inf⁡z∈int⁡K∣K∣ ∣(K−z)∘∣.P(K)=\inf_{z\in\operatorname{int}K}|K|\,|(K-z)^\circ|.P(K)=z∈intKinf​∣K∣∣(K−z)∘∣.

The infimum is attained at the unique Santaló point s(K)s(K)s(K). A simplex is the convex hull of n+1n+1n+1 affinely independent points.

Formalization targets

Goal: the general Mahler conjecture (Theorem 1.1, p. 1)

For every n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and every convex body K⊂RnK\subset\mathbb R^nK⊂Rn,

P(K) ≥ (n+1)n+1(n!)2,P(K)\ \ge\ \frac{(n+1)^{n+1}}{(n!)^2},P(K) ≥ (n!)2(n+1)n+1​,

with equality if and only if KKK is a simplex.

Significance

The result itself. It is the exact form of a problem open since the 1930s and previously settled only in dimensions 222 and 333 and for polytopes with few vertices. Because the infimum over centres is taken, it gives the same lower bound for ∣K∣∣(K−z)∘∣|K||(K-z)^\circ|∣K∣∣(K−z)∘∣ at every interior point zzz. Via the known geometric-to-functional implication, the preprint derives the sharp functional Mahler inequality for log-concave functions and an entropy–transport inequality (Corollary 1.2, p. 4; Corollary 8.1, p. 41). The symmetric conjecture, with the larger constant 4n/n!4^n/n!4n/n!, is a different statement treated in a companion preprint.

Formalizing it. The proof combines convex cones and their Laplace transforms, Gaussian Sobolev calculus, Moreau's decomposition, matrix divided differences, and certified one-variable inequalities. A formal proof would provide checked versions of these tools and of the Santaló point's existence and uniqueness. No machine-checked proof of the conjecture in any dimension n≥2n\ge2n≥2 is known.

Difficulty

Symmetrization does not apply, the volume product is not convex along natural deformations except in restricted families (shadow systems), and local minimality at simplices says nothing about distant bodies. In the preprint's route the main obstacle (Introduction, pp. 2–3) is that the Jacobian matrices Pz=DΠC(Z+ξz)P_z=D\Pi_C(Z+\xi_z)Pz​=DΠC​(Z+ξz​) of the Gaussian-averaged cone projections neither commute nor increase in zzz: bounding them separately loses both the sharp constant and the equality case. Controlling them jointly requires comparing the whole family with spectral thresholds of a linear Gaussian matrix (Sections 5–7), and equality must then force the cone to split into half-lines.

Formalization scope

  • Bodies are subsets of EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with IsCompact, Convex ℝ and nonempty interior, and n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • polarAt K z is the polar about zzz; volumeProduct K is the sInf over interior K of (volume K).toReal * (volume (polarAt K z)).toReal. For an interior zzz the polar is bounded, so toReal reads the true volume; the index set is nonempty because the interior is.
  • The goal is a conjunction: the inequality, and volumeProduct K = (n+1)^(n+1)/(n!)^2 iff K = convexHull ℝ (range v) for some affinely independent v : Fin (n+1) → _.
  • The Santaló point is not named in Lean; using the infimum over interior points is equivalent to evaluating at s(K)s(K)s(K) because the infimum is attained there (Section 2 of the preprint).

Welcome contributions: polar bodies and their volumes in Mathlib, the Santaló point, Laplace transforms of convex cones, and Gaussian integration by parts.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, The Mahler Conjecture for General Convex Bodies, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 22, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/The-Mahler-Conjecture-for-General-Convex-Bodies-September-22-2026/paper.pdf
  • OpenAI, The symmetric Mahler conjecture and its equality cases, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 22, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/The-symmetric-Mahler-conjecture-and-its-equality-cases-September-22-2026/paper.pdf
  • K. Mahler, Ein Übertragungsprinzip für konvexe Körper, Časopis Pěst. Mat. Fys. 68 (1939). https://doi.org/10.21136/CPMF.1939.109441
  • M. Meyer, Convex bodies with minimal volume product in R2\mathbb R^2R2, Monatsh. Math. (1991). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01351770
  • J. Bourgain, V. Milman, New volume ratio properties for convex symmetric bodies in Rn\mathbb R^nRn, Invent. Math. (1987). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01388911
  • G. Kuperberg, From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals, GAFA (2008). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00039-008-0669-4
  • M. Meyer, S. Reisner, Shadow systems and volumes of polar convex bodies, Mathematika (2006). https://doi.org/10.1112/S0025579300000061
  • J. Kim, S. Reisner, Local minimality of the volume-product at the simplex, Mathematika (2011). https://doi.org/10.1112/S0025579310001555
  • B. Klartag, Isotropic constants and Mahler volumes, Adv. Math. (2018). https://doi.org/10.1016/j.aim.2018.03.009
  • V. Mastrantonis, Y. A. Rubinstein, The Nazarov proof of the non-symmetric Bourgain–Milman inequality, Indiana Univ. Math. J. (2024). https://arxiv.org/abs/2206.06188
  • S. Chen, Y. Li, D. Xi, Z. Xu, The Mahler Conjecture in Three Dimensions, preprint (2026). https://arxiv.org/abs/2605.09334v3
2 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Affine Processes on Positive Semidefinite Matrices I: Every Affine Process on the PSD Cone Is Regular and Feller, with Generator (2.12) Given by an Admissible Parameter SetResearch Paper

Motivation

Matrix-valued affine processes on the cone of positive semidefinite matrices are used in finance as models of stochastic covariance: multi-asset option pricing with stochastic volatility and correlation, and fixed-income models with stochastically correlated risk factors and default intensities. The best-known example is the Wishart process of Bru (1991). What makes these models tractable is that the Laplace transform of the state is exponential-affine in the initial state, with exponents that solve ordinary differential equations of Riccati type.

Cuchiero, Filipović, Mayerhofer and Teichmann (2011) give the mathematical foundation: a complete characterization of stochastically continuous affine processes on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ through an admissible parameter set. Their Theorem 2.4 has two halves. This mission formalizes the first, necessity, half: every affine process on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ is regular and Feller, and its generator and Riccati equations are given by an admissible parameter set.

Timeline. Duffie, Filipović and Schachermayer (2003) characterized regular affine processes on the canonical state space R+m×Rn\mathbb R_+^m \times \mathbb R^nR+m​×Rn, assuming regularity. Keller-Ressel, Schachermayer and Teichmann showed that on that state space stochastic continuity already implies regularity. The 2011 paper carries both the characterization and the regularity result over to Sd+S_d^+Sd+​, a non-polyhedral cone with a curved boundary, on which the drift must satisfy the new condition b⪰(d−1)αb \succeq (d-1)\alphab⪰(d−1)α.

Setting

Let SdS_dSd​ be the space of real symmetric d×dd\times dd×d matrices with scalar product ⟨x,y⟩=Tr(xy)\langle x,y\rangle = \mathrm{Tr}(xy)⟨x,y⟩=Tr(xy) and norm ∥x∥=⟨x,x⟩1/2\|x\| = \langle x,x\rangle^{1/2}∥x∥=⟨x,x⟩1/2. Let Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ be the cone of positive semidefinite matrices and Sd++S_d^{++}Sd++​ its interior, and write x⪯yx \preceq yx⪯y when y−x∈Sd+y - x \in S_d^+y−x∈Sd+​.

A time-homogeneous Markov process XXX on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ is described by sub-stochastic transition kernels pt(x,dξ)p_t(x,d\xi)pt​(x,dξ), t≥0t\ge 0t≥0. Mass that is lost goes to a cemetery state Δ\DeltaΔ. The kernels satisfy the Chapman–Kolmogorov equations, and the semigroup is Ptf(x)=∫f(ξ) pt(x,dξ)P_tf(x) = \int f(\xi)\,p_t(x,d\xi)Pt​f(x)=∫f(ξ)pt​(x,dξ). The process is affine (Definition 2.1) if it is stochastically continuous, i.e. ps(x,⋅)→pt(x,⋅)p_s(x,\cdot) \to p_t(x,\cdot)ps​(x,⋅)→pt​(x,⋅) weakly as s→ts \to ts→t, and if there are φ:R+×Sd+→R+\varphi : \mathbb R_+ \times S_d^+ \to \mathbb R_+φ:R+​×Sd+​→R+​ and ψ:R+×Sd+→Sd+\psi : \mathbb R_+\times S_d^+ \to S_d^+ψ:R+​×Sd+​→Sd+​ with

∫Sd+e−⟨u,ξ⟩ pt(x,dξ)=e−φ(t,u)−⟨ψ(t,u),x⟩,t≥0, u,x∈Sd+.\int_{S_d^+} e^{-\langle u,\xi\rangle}\,p_t(x,d\xi) = e^{-\varphi(t,u) - \langle\psi(t,u),x\rangle}, \qquad t\ge0,\ u,x\in S_d^+.∫Sd+​​e−⟨u,ξ⟩pt​(x,dξ)=e−φ(t,u)−⟨ψ(t,u),x⟩,t≥0, u,x∈Sd+​.

It is regular (Definition 2.2) if F(u)=∂tφ(t,u)∣t=0+F(u) = \partial_t\varphi(t,u)|_{t=0+}F(u)=∂t​φ(t,u)∣t=0+​ and R(u)=∂tψ(t,u)∣t=0+R(u) = \partial_t\psi(t,u)|_{t=0+}R(u)=∂t​ψ(t,u)∣t=0+​ exist and are continuous at u=0u=0u=0.

An admissible parameter set (α,b,βij,c,γ,m,μ)(\alpha, b, \beta^{ij}, c, \gamma, m, \mu)(α,b,βij,c,γ,m,μ), associated with a bounded continuous truncation function χ\chiχ (equal to the identity near 000), consists of:

  • a diffusion coefficient α∈Sd+\alpha \in S_d^+α∈Sd+​ and a constant drift b⪰(d−1)αb \succeq (d-1)\alphab⪰(d−1)α;
  • killing rates c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 and γ∈Sd+\gamma \in S_d^+γ∈Sd+​;
  • a jump measure mmm with ∫(∥ξ∥∧1) m(dξ)<∞\int(\|\xi\|\wedge1)\,m(d\xi)<\infty∫(∥ξ∥∧1)m(dξ)<∞;
  • a matrix μ\muμ of finite signed measures with μ(E)∈Sd+\mu(E) \in S_d^+μ(E)∈Sd+​, defining M(x,dξ)=⟨x,μ(dξ)⟩/(∥ξ∥2∧1)M(x,d\xi) = \langle x,\mu(d\xi)\rangle/(\|\xi\|^2\wedge1)M(x,dξ)=⟨x,μ(dξ)⟩/(∥ξ∥2∧1);
  • a linear drift B(x)=∑i,jβijxijB(x) = \sum_{i,j}\beta^{ij}x_{ij}B(x)=∑i,j​βijxij​.

These are subject to the boundary conditions (2.9) and (2.11) for x,u∈Sd+x,u \in S_d^+x,u∈Sd+​ with ⟨x,u⟩=0\langle x,u\rangle = 0⟨x,u⟩=0. The space S+\mathcal S_+S+​ consists of restrictions to Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ of rapidly decreasing smooth functions on SdS_dSd​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.4, first part

If XXX is affine on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​, then XXX is regular and Feller, S+\mathcal S_+S+​ lies in the domain of its generator A\mathcal AA on C0(Sd+)C_0(S_d^+)C0​(Sd+​), and there is an admissible parameter set such that for f∈S+f \in \mathcal S_+f∈S+​

Af(x)=12∑Aijkl(x) ∂ij∂klf(x)+∑(bij+Bij(x)) ∂ijf(x)−(c+⟨γ,x⟩)f(x)+∫(f(x+ξ)−f(x)) m(dξ)+∫(f(x+ξ)−f(x)−⟨χ(ξ),∇f(x)⟩) M(x,dξ),\mathcal Af(x) = \tfrac12\sum A_{ijkl}(x)\,\partial_{ij}\partial_{kl}f(x) + \sum (b_{ij}+B_{ij}(x))\,\partial_{ij}f(x) - (c+\langle\gamma,x\rangle)f(x) + \int (f(x+\xi)-f(x))\,m(d\xi) + \int \big(f(x+\xi)-f(x)-\langle\chi(\xi),\nabla f(x)\rangle\big)\,M(x,d\xi),Af(x)=21​∑Aijkl​(x)∂ij​∂kl​f(x)+∑(bij​+Bij​(x))∂ij​f(x)−(c+⟨γ,x⟩)f(x)+∫(f(x+ξ)−f(x))m(dξ)+∫(f(x+ξ)−f(x)−⟨χ(ξ),∇f(x)⟩)M(x,dξ),

with Aijkl(x)=xikαjl+xilαjk+xjkαil+xjlαikA_{ijkl}(x) = x_{ik}\alpha_{jl}+x_{il}\alpha_{jk}+x_{jk}\alpha_{il}+x_{jl}\alpha_{ik}Aijkl​(x)=xik​αjl​+xil​αjk​+xjk​αil​+xjl​αik​. In addition, φ,ψ\varphi,\psiφ,ψ solve ∂tφ=F(ψ)\partial_t\varphi = F(\psi)∂t​φ=F(ψ), φ(0,u)=0\varphi(0,u)=0φ(0,u)=0, ∂tψ=R(ψ)\partial_t\psi = R(\psi)∂t​ψ=R(ψ), ψ(0,u)=u\psi(0,u) = uψ(0,u)=u, with

F(u)=⟨b,u⟩+c−∫(e−⟨u,ξ⟩−1) m(dξ),R(u)=−2uαu+B⊤(u)+γ−∫e−⟨u,ξ⟩−1+⟨χ(ξ),u⟩∥ξ∥2∧1 μ(dξ).F(u) = \langle b,u\rangle + c - \int (e^{-\langle u,\xi\rangle}-1)\,m(d\xi),\qquad R(u) = -2u\alpha u + B^\top(u) + \gamma - \int \frac{e^{-\langle u,\xi\rangle}-1+\langle\chi(\xi),u\rangle}{\|\xi\|^2\wedge1}\,\mu(d\xi).F(u)=⟨b,u⟩+c−∫(e−⟨u,ξ⟩−1)m(dξ),R(u)=−2uαu+B⊤(u)+γ−∫∥ξ∥2∧1e−⟨u,ξ⟩−1+⟨χ(ξ),u⟩​μ(dξ).

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Lemma 3.1 and Lemma 3.3: order-preserving, continuous, analytic semiflows map Sd++S_d^{++}Sd++​ into Sd++S_d^{++}Sd++​.
  2. Lemma 3.2: semiflow identities, monotonicity, continuity and analyticity of φ,ψ\varphi,\psiφ,ψ.
  3. Proposition 3.4: Feller and regular.
  4. Lemmas 4.1 and 4.4: zero divisors in the cone, and linear extension of additive maps.
  5. Proposition 4.9: F,RF,RF,R have the form (2.16)–(2.17) with b∈Sd+b\in S_d^+b∈Sd+​.
  6. Lemma B.2 and Theorem B.3: exponentials lie in S+\mathcal S_+S+​ and span a dense subspace.
  7. Proposition 4.12: the generator formula (2.12) on S+\mathcal S_+S+​.
  8. Lemma 4.17 and Proposition 4.18: derivatives of det⁡\detdet at diagonal matrices, and the drift condition b⪰(d−1)αb\succeq(d-1)\alphab⪰(d−1)α.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.4 reduces the study of affine processes on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ to finitely many parameters. Any such process, a priori specified only through its Laplace transform, has the Lévy–Khintchine-type generator (2.12), its Laplace exponents solve the Riccati system, and its parameters obey the admissibility conditions. The drift condition b⪰(d−1)αb\succeq(d-1)\alphab⪰(d−1)α is the matrix analogue of the Feller condition, and for d≥2d\ge2d≥2 it excludes affine diffusions on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ with zero constant drift. The Feller property yields càdlàg versions, and the generator formula is the starting point for the semimartingale description and for the converse existence result.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, and this mission produces a machine-checked version of the necessity direction. Along the way it builds reusable infrastructure: a Lean model of Markov transition families on a cone, Feller semigroups on C0C_0C0​ of a closed cone, generators on Schwartz-type test spaces with the symmetric-matrix derivative convention, and the positive semidefinite cone's order and boundary facts. No machine-checked proof of this theorem, or of its R+m×Rn\mathbb R_+^m\times\mathbb R^nR+m​×Rn predecessor, is known to exist.

Difficulty

The definition assumes only stochastic continuity and the exponential-affine form of the Laplace transform; differentiability in time is not given. Obtaining regularity, and hence the Riccati equations, needs the positivity statement of Lemma 3.3. Its proof uses analyticity in uuu and the boundary geometry of Sd+S_d^+Sd+​. Identifying FFF and RRR requires Lévy–Khintchine representations on cones and on SdS_dSd​, and a convergence theorem for Laplace transforms. The admissibility conditions on the boundary come from support considerations at each boundary point. The drift condition (2.4) is not captured by the conditions read off from Laplace exponents at boundary points along single directions; it is a genuinely matrix-valued constraint coupling bbb and α\alphaα. Extending the generator formula from exponentials to all of S+\mathcal S_+S+​ needs a density result in a Fréchet topology and the closedness of the generator.

Formalization scope

  • Matrices are Fin d → Fin d → ℝ, with ⟨x,y⟩=∑xijyji\langle x,y\rangle=\sum x_{ij}y_{ji}⟨x,y⟩=∑xij​yji​ and ∥x∥=⟨x,x⟩1/2\|x\|=\langle x,x\rangle^{1/2}∥x∥=⟨x,x⟩1/2. Mathlib's positive semidefiniteness, which includes symmetry over R\mathbb RR, defines Sd+S_d^+Sd+​. The state space is the subtype Sd+S_d^+Sd+​ with its subspace topology and Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra.
  • Transition families are Mathlib kernels indexed by t∈Rt\in\mathbb Rt∈R and constrained only for t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Sub-stochasticity encodes the cemetery. Stochastic continuity is convergence of integrals of bounded continuous functions as s→ts\to ts→t within [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).
  • The exponents φ,ψ\varphi,\psiφ,ψ are functions on R×Md\mathbb R\times M_dR×Md​, used at t≥0t\ge0t≥0 and positive semidefinite arguments. Analyticity on Sd++S_d^{++}Sd++​ is analyticity of y↦ψ(t,(y+y⊤)/2)y\mapsto\psi(t,(y+y^\top)/2)y↦ψ(t,(y+y⊤)/2) on an open subset of MdM_dMd​.
  • The matrix measure μ\muμ is encoded as H dνH\,d\nuHdν with ν\nuν finite and HHH positive semidefinite and integrable. This loses nothing, since ν=∑iμii\nu = \sum_i\mu_{ii}ν=∑i​μii​ dominates every μij\mu_{ij}μij​.
  • S+\mathcal S_+S+​ is the set of restrictions of Schwartz functions on MdM_dMd​. Partial derivatives ∂/∂xij\partial/\partial x_{ij}∂/∂xij​ of functions on SdS_dSd​ are taken in the direction 12(Eij+Eji)\tfrac12(E^{ij}+E^{ji})21​(Eij+Eji), per §1.2 of the paper. Lemma 4.17 alone uses raw entry derivatives of det⁡\detdet on MdM_dMd​, as its proof does.
  • The Feller property uses the platform definition EthierKurtz.IsStronglyContinuousContractionSemigroup on C0(Sd+)C_0(S_d^+)C0​(Sd+​). "f∈D(A)f\in D(\mathcal A)f∈D(A) and Af=g\mathcal Af=gAf=g" is uniform convergence of (Ptf−f)/t(P_tf-f)/t(Pt​f−f)/t to ggg on Sd+S_d^+Sd+​.
  • Lean assigns the value 000 to the integral of a non-integrable function. Wherever a statement concludes a formula containing an integral, it therefore also concludes integrability of the integrand, so the formula cannot hold through this default value. Regularity and the Feller property are conclusions, never hypotheses, of the goal. The drift condition (2.4) is part of admissibility in the goal; Propositions 4.9, 4.12 and 4.18 use admissibility without (2.4) and b∈Sd+b\in S_d^+b∈Sd+​, as in the paper.
  • Contributions are welcome on any milestone. The matrix lemmas (3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.4, 4.17) are self-contained, and Lemma B.2 and Theorem B.3 concern only Schwartz functions.

Selected references

  • C. Cuchiero, D. Filipović, E. Mayerhofer, J. Teichmann, Affine processes on positive semidefinite matrices, Ann. Appl. Probab. 21 (2011) 397–463; cited as arXiv:0910.0137v3. https://arxiv.org/abs/0910.0137
  • D. Duffie, D. Filipović, W. Schachermayer, Affine processes and applications in finance, Ann. Appl. Probab. 13 (2003) 984–1053. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1060202833
  • M. Keller-Ressel, W. Schachermayer, J. Teichmann, Affine processes are regular, Probab. Theory Related Fields 151 (2011) 591–611. https://arxiv.org/abs/0906.3392
  • M.-F. Bru, Wishart processes, J. Theoret. Probab. 4 (1991) 725–751. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01259552
18 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryNumerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Primal-Dual Active Set Strategy as a Semismooth Newton Method V: Local Superlinear Convergence in L² under a Norm GapResearch Paper

Motivation

Optimal control problems with pointwise bounds on the control, such as

min⁡u12∥y−z∥L22+β2∥u∥L22subject to −Δy=u in Ω, y=0 on ∂Ω, u≤ψ,\min_u \tfrac12\|y - z\|_{L^2}^2 + \tfrac{\beta}{2}\|u\|_{L^2}^2 \quad\text{subject to } -\Delta y = u \text{ in } \Omega,\ y = 0 \text{ on } \partial\Omega,\ u \le \psi,umin​21​∥y−z∥L22​+2β​∥u∥L22​subject to −Δy=u in Ω, y=0 on ∂Ω, u≤ψ,

reduce, after eliminating the state, to a quadratic program in L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω) with a pointwise upper bound. The primal-dual active set strategy solves such problems by guessing the set where the bound is active, solving one linear system on that guess, and updating the guess from the new primal and dual values. It is used routinely in PDE-constrained optimization because each iteration costs one linear solve and, in practice, very few iterations are needed.

Hintermüller, Ito and Kunisch (SIAM J. Optim. 13 (2002) 865–888; authors' version hal-01660511) showed that this strategy is a semismooth Newton method for a nonsmooth reformulation of the optimality system, built on the notion of slant differentiability of Chen, Nashed and Qi (SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 38 (2000) 1200–1216). In finite dimension this gives local superlinear convergence (missions I–IV of this series). This mission concerns the paper's function-space result, Theorem 4.1: in L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω), under a norm gap on the operator, the method still converges locally superlinearly. Ulbrich (SIAM J. Optim. 13 (2003) 805–841) developed a related semismooth Newton theory for superposition operators in function spaces, which also requires a norm gap.

Setting

Let (Ω,μ)(\Omega, \mu)(Ω,μ) be a finite measure space (the paper takes a bounded domain Ω⊂Rn\Omega \subset \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊂Rn with Lebesgue measure) and Lp=Lp(Ω)L^p = L^p(\Omega)Lp=Lp(Ω) the real Lebesgue spaces, with inner product (⋅,⋅)(\cdot,\cdot)(⋅,⋅) on L2L^2L2. The paper writes AAA for an operator and calligraphic A\mathcal{A}A, I\mathcal{I}I for active and inactive sets.

Slant differentiability (Definition 1). For Banach spaces XXX, ZZZ, a map F:X→ZF : X \to ZF:X→Z is slantly differentiable in an open set UUU if there is G:U→L(X,Z)G : U \to \mathcal{L}(X, Z)G:U→L(X,Z), a slanting function, with

lim⁡h→01∥h∥ ∥F(x+h)−F(x)−G(x+h)h∥=0(x∈U).(A)\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{1}{\|h\|}\,\|F(x+h) - F(x) - G(x+h)h\| = 0 \qquad (x \in U). \tag{A}h→0lim​∥h∥1​∥F(x+h)−F(x)−G(x+h)h∥=0(x∈U).(A)

For δ∈R\delta \in \mathbb{R}δ∈R, the candidate slanting function of the pointwise max is Gm(y)(x)=1G_m(y)(x) = 1Gm​(y)(x)=1 if y(x)>0y(x) > 0y(x)>0, 000 if y(x)<0y(x) < 0y(x)<0, δ\deltaδ if y(x)=0y(x) = 0y(x)=0 (4.1).

The problem. Given f,ψ∈L2f, \psi \in L^2f,ψ∈L2 and a self-adjoint A∈L(L2)A \in \mathcal{L}(L^2)A∈L(L2) with

(Ay,y)≥γ∥y∥2(γ>0),(H1)(Ay, y) \ge \gamma\|y\|^2 \quad (\gamma > 0), \tag{H1}(Ay,y)≥γ∥y∥2(γ>0),(H1)

minimize 12(y,Ay)−(f,y)\tfrac12(y, Ay) - (f, y)21​(y,Ay)−(f,y) subject to y≤ψy \le \psiy≤ψ. The solution y∗y^*y∗ and its multiplier λ∗\lambda^*λ∗ are the unique solution of

Ay∗+λ∗=f,λ∗−max⁡(0,λ∗+c(y∗−ψ))=0 a.e.,(4.2)Ay^* + \lambda^* = f, \qquad \lambda^* - \max(0, \lambda^* + c(y^* - \psi)) = 0 \ \text{a.e.}, \tag{4.2}Ay∗+λ∗=f,λ∗−max(0,λ∗+c(y∗−ψ))=0 a.e.,(4.2)

for any fixed c>0c > 0c>0. The norm gap hypothesis is

A=C+βI,C∈L(L2,Lq),β>0,q>2.(H2)A = C + \beta I, \qquad C \in \mathcal{L}(L^2, L^q),\quad \beta > 0,\quad q > 2. \tag{H2}A=C+βI,C∈L(L2,Lq),β>0,q>2.(H2)

The algorithm. From (y0,λ0)∈L2×L2(y^0, \lambda^0) \in L^2 \times L^2(y0,λ0)∈L2×L2, set Ak={x:λk(x)+c(yk(x)−ψ(x))>0}\mathcal{A}_k = \{x : \lambda^k(x) + c(y^k(x) - \psi(x)) > 0\}Ak​={x:λk(x)+c(yk(x)−ψ(x))>0}, Ik=Ω∖Ak\mathcal{I}_k = \Omega\setminus\mathcal{A}_kIk​=Ω∖Ak​, and solve

Ayk+1+λk+1=f,yk+1=ψ on Ak,λk+1=0 on Ik.Ay^{k+1} + \lambda^{k+1} = f, \qquad y^{k+1} = \psi \text{ on } \mathcal{A}_k, \qquad \lambda^{k+1} = 0 \text{ on } \mathcal{I}_k.Ayk+1+λk+1=f,yk+1=ψ on Ak​,λk+1=0 on Ik​.

A sequence obeying this rule for every kkk is a run. Superlinear convergence of xk→x∗x^k \to x^*xk→x∗ means xk→x∗x^k \to x^*xk→x∗ and, for every η>0\eta > 0η>0, eventually ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤η∥xk−x∗∥\|x^{k+1} - x^*\| \le \eta\|x^k - x^*\|∥xk+1−x∗∥≤η∥xk−x∗∥.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (p. 15)

The page reads: "Assume that (H1), (H2) hold and that ψ and f are in L^q(Ω). Then the primal-dual active set strategy or, equivalently, the semismooth Newton method converge superlinearly if ‖y⁰ − y*‖ is sufficiently small and λ⁰ = β(y⁰ − ψ)." The formalized goal is the statement the proof establishes: with c=βc = \betac=β, there is ρ>0\rho > 0ρ>0 such that every run with

∥y0−y∗∥L2<ρ,λ0=f−Ay0\|y^0 - y^*\|_{L^2} < \rho, \qquad \lambda^0 = f - Ay^0∥y0−y∗∥L2​<ρ,λ0=f−Ay0

converges superlinearly to (y∗,λ∗)(y^*, \lambda^*)(y∗,λ∗) in L2×L2L^2 \times L^2L2×L2. The initialization differs from the printed one; see Formalization scope.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1.1 (Chen–Nashed–Qi): slant differentiability near a zero x∗x^*x∗ with uniformly bounded G(x)−1G(x)^{-1}G(x)−1 gives local superlinear convergence of xk+1=xk−G(xk)−1F(xk)x^{k+1} = x^k - G(x^k)^{-1}F(x^k)xk+1=xk−G(xk)−1F(xk).
  2. Proposition 4.1(ii): for 1≤p<q≤∞1 \le p < q \le \infty1≤p<q≤∞, max⁡(0,⋅):Lq→Lp\max(0,\cdot) : L^q \to L^pmax(0,⋅):Lq→Lp is slantly differentiable with slanting function GmG_mGm​.
  3. (4.9)–(4.10): for c=βc = \betac=β, (4.2) is equivalent to βy∗−βψ+max⁡(0,Cy∗−f+βψ)=0\beta y^* - \beta\psi + \max(0, Cy^* - f + \beta\psi) = 0βy∗−βψ+max(0,Cy∗−f+βψ)=0 and λ∗=f−Cy∗−βy∗\lambda^* = f - Cy^* - \beta y^*λ∗=f−Cy∗−βy∗.
  4. Equivalence of the algorithms: along a run with c=βc = \betac=β and λ0=f−Ay0\lambda^0 = f - Ay^0λ0=f−Ay0, λk+β(yk−ψ)=f−Cyk−βψ\lambda^k + \beta(y^k - \psi) = f - Cy^k - \beta\psiλk+β(yk−ψ)=f−Cyk−βψ for all kkk, so the active sets are those of the reduced algorithm.
  5. Slant differentiability of the reduced map F(y)=βy−βψ+max⁡(0,Cy−f+βψ)F(y) = \beta y - \beta\psi + \max(0, Cy - f + \beta\psi)F(y)=βy−βψ+max(0,Cy−f+βψ) on L2L^2L2, with GF(y+h)=βI+Gm(Cy−f+βψ+Ch)CG_F(y+h) = \beta I + G_m(Cy - f + \beta\psi + Ch)CGF​(y+h)=βI+Gm​(Cy−f+βψ+Ch)C, δ=1\delta = 1δ=1.
  6. Bounded inverses: GF(z)G_F(z)GF​(z) is invertible on L2L^2L2, with ∥GF(z)−1∥\|G_F(z)^{-1}\|∥GF​(z)−1∥ bounded uniformly in zzz.

Two companion items accompany the goal: existence of a run from every y0y^0y0, and Proposition 4.1(i), the paper's counterexamples showing that GmG_mGm​ fails to be a slanting function from LpL^pLp to LpL^pLp.

Significance

Theorem 4.1 is the infinite-dimensional justification of a method used throughout control-constrained optimal control: it shows that the method converges locally superlinearly for the continuous problem itself, not only for each discretization. Example 1 of the paper shows that distributed control of the Poisson equation, and boundary control with Sobolev embeddings, satisfy (H2). Proposition 4.1 isolates the structural reason: the pointwise max is a Newton-differentiable map only between spaces with a norm gap.

None of these results is known to be machine-checked. A complete development would provide slant differentiability in Banach spaces, the Chen–Nashed–Qi local convergence theorem, the norm-gap differentiability of max⁡(0,⋅)\max(0,\cdot)max(0,⋅) between Lebesgue spaces, and invertibility of block operators on L2L^2L2 of a measurable partition. Each of these is reusable for other semismooth Newton analyses in function space.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the max. In finite dimension, max⁡(0,⋅)\max(0,\cdot)max(0,⋅) is slantly differentiable with GmG_mGm​ because a small perturbation does not change the sign of any nonzero component. In L2L^2L2, a perturbation hhh of small norm can flip the sign of yyy on a set of positive measure, and on that set the error max⁡(0,y+h)−max⁡(0,y)−Gm(y+h)h\max(0, y+h) - \max(0, y) - G_m(y+h)hmax(0,y+h)−max(0,y)−Gm​(y+h)h is as large as ∣y∣|y|∣y∣. Proposition 4.1(i) shows that this error is not o(∥h∥Lp)o(\|h\|_{L^p})o(∥h∥Lp​) in LpL^pLp for any ppp. Superlinear convergence in L2L^2L2 therefore needs the argument of the max to be controlled in a stronger norm than the error is measured in, which is what (H2) and f,ψ∈Lqf, \psi \in L^qf,ψ∈Lq provide. A second difficulty is that the two-variable algorithm is not literally a Newton method for a map of yyy alone; it must be identified with the reduced algorithm, and that identification depends on the initialization.

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. LpL^pLp is Mathlib's Lp ℝ p μ on an arbitrary finite measure space; q∈(2,∞]q \in (2, \infty]q∈(2,∞] is an extended real with 2 < q. The paper's bounded Lipschitz domain is replaced by a finite measure space: the proofs use only ∣Ω∣<∞|\Omega| < \infty∣Ω∣<∞, and Mathlib has no notion of Lipschitz boundary.
  • Pointwise statements on LpL^pLp classes are almost everywhere statements about representatives. (H2) is stated as Ay=Cy+βyAy = Cy + \beta yAy=Cy+βy a.e. for every y∈L2y \in L^2y∈L2, which avoids building the inclusion Lq⊆L2L^q \subseteq L^2Lq⊆L2.
  • Hypotheses kept: self-adjointness of AAA, (H1) with explicit γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0, (H2) with β>0\beta > 0β>0 and q>2q > 2q>2, f,ψ∈Lqf, \psi \in L^qf,ψ∈Lq. The solution (y∗,λ∗)(y^*, \lambda^*)(y∗,λ∗) of (4.2) is a hypothesis; it exists and is unique under (H1), as the paper states on p. 12.
  • The initialization. The printed λ0=β(y0−ψ)\lambda^0 = \beta(y^0 - \psi)λ0=β(y0−ψ) does not support the proof, which uses "λ0+β(y0−ψ)=f−Cy0−βψ\lambda^0 + \beta(y^0 - \psi) = f - Cy^0 - \beta\psiλ0+β(y0−ψ)=f−Cy0−βψ" and c=βc = \betac=β. That identity holds exactly for λ0=f−Ay0\lambda^0 = f - Ay^0λ0=f−Ay0. The goal uses λ0=f−Ay0\lambda^0 = f - Ay^0λ0=f−Ay0 and c=βc = \betac=β. With the printed initialization the first active set is {y0>ψ}\{y^0 > \psi\}{y0>ψ}, and for y0y^0y0 slightly below y∗y^*y∗ the first iterate solves the unconstrained problem, which can be far from y∗y^*y∗.
  • Superlinear convergence is stated for the pair (yk,λk)(y^k, \lambda^k)(yk,λk) in the product norm max⁡(∥y∥,∥λ∥)\max(\|y\|, \|\lambda\|)max(∥y∥,∥λ∥), without dividing by ∥xk−x∗∥\|x^k - x^*\|∥xk−x∗∥, so finite termination qualifies. "Sufficiently small" is an ∃ρ>0\exists\rho > 0∃ρ>0 chosen before the run, on ∥y0−y∗∥\|y^0 - y^*\|∥y0−y∗∥ only.
  • No trivialization. The goal mentions neither the reduced algorithm, nor GFG_FGF​, nor Proposition 4.1; the norm gap q>2q > 2q>2 is not weakened to C∈L(L2)C \in \mathcal{L}(L^2)C∈L(L2), under which Proposition 4.1(i) shows that GmG_mGm​ need not be a slanting function; and the companion run_exists shows that the runs the goal quantifies over exist.
  • Definitions (PDASNewton.FunSpace.Setting): slanting functions, superlinear convergence, GmG_mGm​, property (A) for max⁡(0,⋅):Lq→Lp\max(0,\cdot) : L^q \to L^pmax(0,⋅):Lq→Lp, system (4.2), one step and runs of the algorithm. These duplicate the finite-dimensional definitions of the other missions of the series in a separate namespace.

Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are reusable lemmas on Lebesgue spaces (Hölder on sets of small measure, multiplication operators, Lax–Milgram on L2L^2L2 of a measurable subset).

Selected references

  • M. Hintermüller, K. Ito, K. Kunisch, The primal-dual active set strategy as a semismooth Newton method, SIAM J. Optim. 13(3) (2002) 865–888. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623401383558 ; authors' version https://hal.science/hal-01660511
  • X. Chen, Z. Nashed, L. Qi, Smoothing methods and semismooth methods for nondifferentiable operator equations, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 38 (2000) 1200–1216. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0036142999356719
  • M. Ulbrich, Semismooth Newton methods for operator equations in function spaces, SIAM J. Optim. 13 (2003) 805–841. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400371569
  • L. Qi, J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Math. Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 2: The Dual Supremum Equals the Lower Limit of the Perturbed Infimum, sup (P*) = lim inf_{z→0} inf (P(z))Research Paper

Motivation

A convex minimization problem comes with a dual maximization problem, and the dual value never exceeds the primal value. When the two values differ, a duality gap occurs. Dual bounds, Lagrangian relaxations and optimality certificates are then weaker than hoped. Conditions that rule the gap out are constraint qualifications such as Slater's condition and Rockafellar's notion of a stably set problem. Such conditions say when the gap vanishes, but not what the dual value is when it does not.

R. T. Rockafellar's 1967 paper answers that question for the Fenchel-type pair of problems built from a convex function, a concave function and a continuous linear map between infinite-dimensional spaces. Its Theorem 6 (§6, "Weak duality theorems", pp. 179–180) "explains the exact way in which inf (P) and sup (P*) can fail to be equal", by expressing the dual value through the primal problem alone: the dual supremum is the lower limit of the optimal values of slightly perturbed primal problems. This perturbational view of duality was later developed in Rockafellar's Conjugate Duality and Optimization (1974). It underlies the modern treatment of value functions in convex optimization.

Setting

Two real vector spaces EEE and E∗E^*E∗ are topologically paired when each carries a locally convex Hausdorff topology, they are in duality under a bilinear form ⟨x,x∗⟩\langle x,x^*\rangle⟨x,x∗⟩ that is continuous in each variable, and every continuous linear functional on either space is the pairing with exactly one element of the other. Let (E,E∗)(E,E^*)(E,E∗) and (F,F∗)(F,F^*)(F,F∗) be two such pairs. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear and A∗:F∗→E∗A^*:F^*\to E^*A∗:F∗→E∗ its adjoint, the continuous linear map with ⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩\langle Ax,y^*\rangle=\langle x,A^*y^*\rangle⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩.

A function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] is convex when its epigraph {(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)}\{(x,\mu)\mid\mu\in\mathbb R,\ \mu\ge f(x)\}{(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)} is convex in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R. It is proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere. A function ggg is proper concave when −g-g−g is convex, ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞, and ggg is finite somewhere. The standing hypotheses are that fff is lower semicontinuous proper convex on EEE and ggg is upper semicontinuous proper concave on FFF. Their conjugates are

f∗(x∗)=sup⁡x{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.f^*(x^*)=\sup_{x}\{\langle x,x^*\rangle-f(x)\},\qquad g^*(y^*)=\inf_{y}\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-g(y)\}.f∗(x∗)=xsup​{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=yinf​{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.

The primal problem (P) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈Ex\in Ex∈E. The dual problem (P*) is to maximize g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) over y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗. For z∈Fz\in Fz∈F the perturbed problem (P(zzz)) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z). Its value defines the perturbation function

h(z)=inf⁡(P(z))=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf(\mathrm P(z))=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(\mathrm P).h(z)=inf(P(z))=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The lower semicontinuous hull of hhh is hˉ(y)=lim inf⁡z→yh(z)\bar h(y)=\liminf_{z\to y}h(z)hˉ(y)=liminfz→y​h(z), where z=yz=yz=y is allowed, so that hˉ≤h\bar h\le hhˉ≤h. All infima and suprema are taken in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

sup⁡(P∗)=lim inf⁡z→0 [inf⁡(P(z))],\sup(\mathrm P^*)=\liminf_{z\to 0}\,[\inf(\mathrm P(z))],sup(P∗)=z→0liminf​[inf(P(z))],

valid except in the trivial case where the left side is −∞-\infty−∞ and the right side is +∞+\infty+∞. No consistency, constraint qualification or attainment is assumed, and neither side need be finite. The exception is exactly the stated conjunction. A version assuming (P) consistent would be weaker, since an inconsistent (P), with h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, may still have a finite lower limit.

Milestones: the four claims of the proof (p. 180)

  1. hˉ\bar hhˉ is a lower semicontinuous convex function on FFF.
  2. For every y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗, with hˉ∗(y∗)=sup⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)}\bar h^*(y^*)=\sup_y\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-\bar h(y)\}hˉ∗(y∗)=supy​{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)},
−hˉ∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=inf⁡z{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).-\bar h^*(y^*)=\inf_y\{\bar h(y)-\langle y,y^*\rangle\}=\inf_z\{h(z)-\langle z,y^*\rangle\}=g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*).−hˉ∗(y∗)=yinf​{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=zinf​{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).
  1. (6.2): if hˉ\bar hhˉ is proper, then hˉ(0)=sup⁡y∗{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}\bar h(0)=\sup_{y^*}\{\langle 0,y^*\rangle-\bar h^*(y^*)\}hˉ(0)=supy∗​{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}.
  2. If hˉ\bar hhˉ is not proper, the maximand g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) of (P*) is identically −∞-\infty−∞.

The paper's Lemma 2 (convexity of hhh) is used by the first claim. It is a milestone of the companion mission on Theorem 3 of the same paper and is not restated here.

Significance

Theorem 6 reduces every question about the dual value to a question about the primal value function near the origin. Strong duality inf⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)\inf(\mathrm P)=\sup(\mathrm P^*)inf(P)=sup(P∗) holds exactly when hhh is lower semicontinuous at 000 (outside the trivial case). A duality gap is exactly a downward jump of hhh at 000. The dual of (P*) obeys the same formula, which the paper uses to derive Theorem 7 on normal problems. An integer-lattice analogue appears in discrete convex analysis (Murota, Theorem 8.53, whose duality relation is already stated on Prove2Me as DiscreteConvex.ConjugacyDualityD.general_duality_relations). That statement has no topology and is not the same theorem.

The result is classical and its proof is published. As far as the platform's index shows, no machine-checked statement of it exists in the paper's generality, nor a statement of extended-real biconjugation on general paired locally convex spaces. The value of the mission is a formal proof in the paper's setting: arbitrary topologically paired spaces, extended-real-valued functions, and both the proper and the improper case of the hull. The biconjugation milestone (6.2) and the hull lemma are reusable for other perturbational duality results.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares h(0)h(0)h(0) with the dual objective directly. It cannot give the theorem, because hhh may jump at 000, and the dual objective does not detect the value of hhh at a single point: the target is a lower limit, not a value. In infinite dimensions, conjugacy recovers a function only when it is lower semicontinuous and convex for a topology compatible with the pairing, so the statement depends on the full compatibility of the pairing on FFF, not on a norm. The usual statements of biconjugation cover proper functions only, whereas here the lower limit may take both values ±∞\pm\infty±∞, and both cases of the theorem must be covered. Finally, extended-real arithmetic must be tracked so that the dual objective, defined from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗, is matched in every infinite case.

Formalization scope

Values lie in EReal. Infima and suprema are complete-lattice ⨅ and ⨆, so an empty or unbounded family gives ±∞\pm\infty±∞ as in the paper. The lower limit is Filter.liminf h (nhds y) over the full neighbourhood filter: a punctured limit would change the theorem. Convexity is epigraph convexity in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R, and properness is the paper's two-sided condition. A topological pairing is a structure holding a bilinear map, separate continuity, and existence and uniqueness of representing elements in both directions. No norm, inner product or finite dimension is assumed. The adjoint A∗A^*A∗ is continuous linear data satisfying the adjoint identity. The conjugates f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ are defined by the paper's formulas from fff, ggg, so their regularity is a consequence, not a hypothesis. Properness of fff and ggg excludes the form (+∞)−(+∞)(+\infty)-(+\infty)(+∞)−(+∞) from f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z) and from g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗). No statement is repaired relative to the page.

The dual value is the supremum of the maximand built from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗ as on p. 172. Defining sup⁡(P∗)\sup(\mathrm P^*)sup(P∗) through hˉ\bar hhˉ (for instance as the biconjugate of hˉ\bar hhˉ at 000) would make Theorem 6 true by definition and is ruled out.

A complete development needs extended-real conjugates on paired spaces, the lower semicontinuous hull and the closure of a convex epigraph, and Fenchel–Moreau for proper lower semicontinuous convex functions on a locally convex space. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and lemmas toward Fenchel–Moreau in this generality, are welcome contributions.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967), 167–187. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167
  • W. Fenchel, On conjugate convex functions, Canad. J. Math. 1 (1949), 73–77. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1949-007-x
  • A. Brøndsted, Conjugate convex functions in topological vector spaces, Mat.-Fys. Medd. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. 34 (1964) (reference [2] of the paper; no DOI).
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes en dualité, multigraph, Séminaires de Mathématique, Faculté des Sciences, Université de Montpellier, 1962 (reference [12] of the paper; no DOI).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003, Theorem 8.53. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 1: A Convex Program Is Stably Set If and Only If Its Infimum Equals the Attained Maximum of the Dual, inf (P) = max (P*)Research Paper

Motivation

In convex optimization, a dual problem supplies a bound on what a primal minimization problem can achieve. The bound can be useful even when no minimizer is known, but an equality of the primal and dual values says more: it certifies that the bound is exact. In applications, one also wants a dual variable that actually attains the bound, since that variable can act as a multiplier or a sensitivity certificate. Rockafellar's 1967 paper asks when such an attained equality follows from the behavior of the primal value under small changes to the problem Rockafellar 1967.

The paper works with locally convex spaces paired with their continuous duals, rather than limiting the question to finite-dimensional vectors or normed spaces. In this setting, ordinary finite-dimensional constraint qualifications need not describe the relevant behavior. Theorem 3 gives a criterion in terms of the perturbation function itself. It also states the corresponding criterion with the primal and dual roles reversed Rockafellar 1967, §5.

Setting

Let EEE and E′E'E′ be real locally convex Hausdorff spaces in topological duality, with pairing ⟨x,x′⟩E\langle x,x'\rangle_E⟨x,x′⟩E​. Let FFF and F′F'F′ be another such pair. Each pairing represents every continuous linear functional on either member uniquely by a point of the other member. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear, and let its continuous adjoint A∗:F′→E′A^*:F'\to E'A∗:F′→E′ satisfy ⟨Ax,y′⟩F=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E\langle Ax,y'\rangle_F=\langle x,A^*y'\rangle_E⟨Ax,y′⟩F​=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E​.

The primal data are a lower semicontinuous proper convex function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] and an upper semicontinuous proper concave function g:F→[−∞,+∞]g:F\to[-\infty,+\infty]g:F→[−∞,+∞]. Here proper means that fff never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere, while ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞ and is finite somewhere. Convexity means convexity of the real epigraph, and concavity means convexity of −g-g−g. Their conjugates are f∗(x′)=sup⁡x(⟨x,x′⟩E−f(x))f^*(x')=\sup_x(\langle x,x'\rangle_E-f(x))f∗(x′)=supx​(⟨x,x′⟩E​−f(x)) and g∗(y′)=inf⁡y(⟨y,y′⟩F−g(y))g^*(y')=\inf_y(\langle y,y'\rangle_F-g(y))g∗(y′)=infy​(⟨y,y′⟩F​−g(y)) Rockafellar 1967, §2.

The primal problem (P)(P)(P) minimizes f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over EEE. Its dual (P∗)(P^*)(P∗) maximizes g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′)g^*(y')-f^*(A^*y')g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′) over F′F'F′. A translation z∈Fz\in Fz∈F changes the primal objective to f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z), giving

h(z)=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(P).h(z)=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The primal problem is stably set when it is consistent, meaning h(0)<+∞h(0)<+\inftyh(0)<+∞, and when directional rates of change of hhh at zero cannot be arbitrarily negative in every neighborhood of zero. The instability test is made only when h(0)h(0)h(0) is finite. Consequently h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞ counts as stable, as the paper explicitly observes Rockafellar 1967, §4–5. The dual stability condition is the same definition applied to the dual's minimization form (P′)(P')(P′), with perturbations in E′E'E′.

Formalization targets

The goal is both directions of Theorem 3, including the dual statement:

(P) stably set⟺inf⁡(P)=max⁡(P∗),(P)\text{ stably set}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \inf(P)=\max(P^*),(P) stably set⟺inf(P)=max(P∗), min⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.\min(P)=\sup(P^*)\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad (P^*)\text{ stably set}.min(P)=sup(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.

The symbols max⁡\maxmax and min⁡\minmin assert that the stated value is attained. A statement equating only an infimum and a supremum would omit part of the theorem. The mission's milestones are the convexity of hhh (Lemma 2), the equivalence between stability and a nonempty subdifferential ∂h(0)\partial h(0)∂h(0), the criterion linking a subgradient to inequality (5.1), and weak duality (Lemma 1). Each is a claim stated in the paper's proof or as a numbered lemma Rockafellar 1967, pp. 174, 178–179.

Significance

The theorem turns a local property of the optimal-value function into an exact, attained duality statement. A dual optimum has operational meaning: its point y′∈F′y'\in F'y′∈F′ is a continuous linear response to perturbations z∈Fz\in Fz∈F, expressed through ⟨z,y′⟩F\langle z,y'\rangle_F⟨z,y′⟩F​. The converse says that attained exact duality already forces the same stability property. The dual half adds a symmetric criterion for attainment of the primal minimum Rockafellar 1967, Theorem 3.

The 1967 result is proved in the cited paper; this mission asks for its Lean formalization. A complete development would give reusable definitions for paired locally convex spaces, extended-real conjugates, epigraph convexity, and perturbation-based stability. The milestone statements expose the intermediate mathematical claims separately, so later formalizations can use the parts they need without importing the entire theorem.

Difficulty

Weak duality by itself gives only an inequality. It does not supply a dual point achieving the primal infimum, and equality of two extended-real lattice values does not establish attainment. The central issue is that a perturbation function can have a finite value at zero yet fall at arbitrarily steep rates in nearby directions; then no continuous linear support at zero need exist. Infinite primal values bring two additional cases: inconsistency when h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, and the paper's stable case when h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞. The dual half requires the topology on E′E'E′ because the translated dual problem is perturbed there Rockafellar 1967, §§4–5.

Formalization scope

The Lean representation uses EReal for all objective and conjugate values; its complete lattice gives the paper's ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values for unbounded or empty extrema. Spaces are arbitrary locally convex Hausdorff real topological vector spaces equipped with a pairing that identifies each space with the continuous linear dual of the other. The adjoint is continuous linear data constrained by the pairing identity. Properness rules out endpoint arithmetic of the form +∞−(+∞)+\infty-(+\infty)+∞−(+∞) in the primal and dual objectives. The conjugates are defined from fff and ggg; their regularity is not assumed separately.

Stability is encoded using the positive one-sided lower limit of directional difference quotients, which equals the paper's limit for convex hhh. It requires consistency and excludes arbitrarily negative rates in every neighborhood. It is not defined by ∂h(0)≠∅\partial h(0)\ne\varnothing∂h(0)=∅: that equivalence is an independent milestone. Attained extrema are represented by greatest and least elements of the ranges of the objective functions, rather than by equality of lattice values alone. The formalization includes both halves of Theorem 3 and all four listed milestones. Contributions toward general convex analysis on paired spaces and toward the extended-real endpoint cases are useful beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 21 (1967), 167–187. DOI: 10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions: Strong Approximation by a Function with Lipschitzian Inverse Yields a Unique Lipschitzian Implicit FunctionResearch Paper

Why a nonsmooth implicit-function theorem

The classical implicit-function theorem solves an equation F(x,y)=0F(x, y) = 0F(x,y)=0 for xxx as a function of a parameter yyy near a known solution (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​), provided FFF is (strongly) Fréchet differentiable in xxx with an invertible partial derivative. Much of optimization does not meet that hypothesis. Optimality conditions of constrained problems, complementarity problems and variational inequalities are routinely rewritten as equations involving the projection onto a convex set, the componentwise min⁡\minmin, or the normal map of a polyhedron. These maps are Lipschitzian and piecewise smooth, but not differentiable. Sensitivity analysis asks whether the solution of such a system moves Lipschitz-continuously with the problem data, and the classical theorem cannot answer it.

Stephen M. Robinson, An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(2), 1991, pp. 292–309, gives a theorem with the same shape as the classical one, in which differentiability is replaced by strong approximation by a function whose inverse is Lipschitzian. The paper's §4 applies it to parametric variational inequalities over polyhedral sets through the normal map.

Timeline. Robinson's Strongly regular generalized equations (Math. Oper. Res. 5, 1980) proved an implicit-function theorem for generalized equations under a linearization hypothesis called strong regularity. The 1991 paper reformulates that idea for single-valued nonsmooth equations: the approximating function fff need not be linear. Lemma 3.1 extends the Banach perturbation lemma for linear operators (Kantorovich–Akilov, Functional Analysis, Th. 4(2.V)) to Lipschitzian functions; after acceptance, A. Ioffe pointed the author to closely related results of Dmitruk, Milyutin and Osmolovskii (Lyusternik's theorem and the theory of extrema, Russian Math. Surveys, 1980, Theorems 1.2, 1.3), credited in the paper's footnote.

Setting

Let XXX, YYY, ZZZ be real normed linear spaces, with XXX complete. Fix x0∈Xx_0 \in Xx0​∈X, y0∈Yy_0 \in Yy0​∈Y, a neighborhood Ξ\XiΞ of x0x_0x0​ and a neighborhood HHH of y0y_0y0​. Let FFF map Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H to ZZZ, with F(x0,y0)=0F(x_0, y_0) = 0F(x0​,y0​)=0, and let fff map Ξ\XiΞ to ZZZ, with f(x0)=0f(x_0) = 0f(x0​)=0. B(x,ρ)B(x, \rho)B(x,ρ) denotes the closed ball of radius ρ\rhoρ about xxx.

Expansion modulus. For a map fff between metric spaces and a set SSS,

δ(f,S)=inf⁡{∥f(x1)−f(x2)∥∥x1−x2∥:x1≠x2, x1,x2∈S}.\delta(f, S) = \inf\left\{ \frac{\|f(x_1) - f(x_2)\|}{\|x_1 - x_2\|} : x_1 \ne x_2,\ x_1, x_2 \in S \right\}.δ(f,S)=inf{∥x1​−x2​∥∥f(x1​)−f(x2​)∥​:x1​=x2​, x1​,x2​∈S}.

If δ(f,S)>0\delta(f,S) > 0δ(f,S)>0, then fff is one-to-one on SSS and its inverse is Lipschitzian with modulus δ(f,S)−1\delta(f,S)^{-1}δ(f,S)−1. In Lean the mission works with lower bounds: ExpansionAtLeast f S d says d ∥x1−x2∥≤∥f(x1)−f(x2)∥d\,\|x_1 - x_2\| \le \|f(x_1) - f(x_2)\|d∥x1​−x2​∥≤∥f(x1​)−f(x2​)∥ on SSS, i.e. d≤δ(f,S)d \le \delta(f,S)d≤δ(f,S).

Strong approximation (Definition 2.4). fff strongly approximates FFF in xxx at (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​), written f≈xFf \approx_x Ff≈x​F (Lean: StronglyApproxInX f F x₀ y₀), if for each ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there are neighborhoods UUU of x0x_0x0​ and VVV of y0y_0y0​ with

∥[F(x,y)−f(x)]−[F(x′,y)−f(x′)]∥≤ε∥x−x′∥(x,x′∈U, y∈V).\big\|[F(x, y) - f(x)] - [F(x', y) - f(x')]\big\| \le \varepsilon \|x - x'\| \qquad (x, x' \in U,\ y \in V).​[F(x,y)−f(x)]−[F(x′,y)−f(x′)]​≤ε∥x−x′∥(x,x′∈U, y∈V).

When fff is the partial derivative map x↦Fx(x0,y0)(x−x0)x \mapsto F_x(x_0,y_0)(x - x_0)x↦Fx​(x0​,y0​)(x−x0​) this is strong partial Fréchet differentiability; in general fff may be piecewise linear or any map with a Lipschitzian inverse.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 299)

Assume (a) f≈xFf \approx_x Ff≈x​F at (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​); (b) for each x∈Ξx \in \Xix∈Ξ, F(x,⋅)F(x, \cdot)F(x,⋅) is Lipschitzian on HHH with modulus φ\varphiφ; (c) f(Ξ)f(\Xi)f(Ξ) is a neighborhood of 000 in ZZZ; (d) δ(f,Ξ)=:d0>0\delta(f, \Xi) =: d_0 > 0δ(f,Ξ)=:d0​>0. Then for each λ>d0−1φ\lambda > d_0^{-1}\varphiλ>d0−1​φ there are neighborhoods U⊆ΞU \subseteq \XiU⊆Ξ of x0x_0x0​, V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H of y0y_0y0​ and a function x:V→Ux : V \to Ux:V→U with

x(y0)=x0,∥x(y1)−x(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥ (y1,y2∈V),{ξ∈U:F(ξ,y)=0}={x(y)} (y∈V).x(y_0) = x_0, \qquad \|x(y_1) - x(y_2)\| \le \lambda \|y_1 - y_2\| \ (y_1, y_2 \in V), \qquad \{\xi \in U : F(\xi, y) = 0\} = \{x(y)\} \ (y \in V).x(y0​)=x0​,∥x(y1​)−x(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ (y1​,y2​∈V),{ξ∈U:F(ξ,y)=0}={x(y)} (y∈V).

Every λ\lambdaλ strictly above φ/d0\varphi/d_0φ/d0​ is claimed; λ=φ/d0\lambda = \varphi/d_0λ=φ/d0​ is not.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.1 (p. 298), the Lipschitz perturbation lemma: if fff maps Ω\OmegaΩ onto a ball B(y0,α)B(y_0, \alpha)B(y0​,α), hhh is Lipschitzian with modulus η<δ:=δ(f,Ω)\eta < \delta := \delta(f, \Omega)η<δ:=δ(f,Ω), Ω⊇B(x0,δ−1α)\Omega \supseteq B(x_0, \delta^{-1}\alpha)Ω⊇B(x0​,δ−1α) and θ:=(1−ηδ−1)α−∥h(x0)∥≥0\theta := (1 - \eta\delta^{-1})\alpha - \|h(x_0)\| \ge 0θ:=(1−ηδ−1)α−∥h(x0​)∥≥0, then
(f+h)(B(x0,δ−1α))⊇B(y0,θ),δ(f+h,Ω)≥δ−η>0.(f + h)\big(B(x_0, \delta^{-1}\alpha)\big) \supseteq B(y_0, \theta), \qquad \delta(f + h, \Omega) \ge \delta - \eta > 0.(f+h)(B(x0​,δ−1α))⊇B(y0​,θ),δ(f+h,Ω)≥δ−η>0.
  1. (3.1)–(3.2) in the proof of Theorem 3.2 (p. 300): for every ε∈(0,d0)\varepsilon \in (0, d_0)ε∈(0,d0​) there are α,κ>0\alpha, \kappa > 0α,κ>0 and a neighborhood V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H of y0y_0y0​ with Ω=B(x0,d0−1α)⊆Ξ\Omega = B(x_0, d_0^{-1}\alpha) \subseteq \XiΩ=B(x0​,d0−1​α)⊆Ξ such that for each y∈Vy \in Vy∈V
δ(F(⋅,y),Ω)≥d0−ε,F(⋅,y)(Ω)⊇B(0,θ(y))⊇B(0,κ),\delta(F(\cdot, y), \Omega) \ge d_0 - \varepsilon, \qquad F(\cdot, y)(\Omega) \supseteq B(0, \theta(y)) \supseteq B(0, \kappa),δ(F(⋅,y),Ω)≥d0​−ε,F(⋅,y)(Ω)⊇B(0,θ(y))⊇B(0,κ),

where θ(y)=(1−εd0−1)α−∥F(x0,y)∥\theta(y) = (1 - \varepsilon d_0^{-1})\alpha - \|F(x_0, y)\|θ(y)=(1−εd0−1​)α−∥F(x0​,y)∥.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 yields existence, local uniqueness and Lipschitz dependence of solutions of parametrized nonsmooth equations, with an explicit Lipschitz modulus arbitrarily close to φ/d0\varphi/d_0φ/d0​. In the paper it underlies Theorem 3.3 and Corollary 3.4 (approximation and B-differentiation of the implicit function) and the sensitivity results of §4 for parametric variational inequalities over polyhedral convex sets. The same template, an equation approximated by a map with Lipschitzian inverse, is the basis of later strong-regularity and semismooth-Newton analyses in nonlinear programming and complementarity.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; it has not been machine-checked. The platform has the smooth implicit-function theorem (FamousTheorems.implicit_function_theorem, Rudin.ch09_implicit_function) and Mathlib has the contraction mapping principle, but there is no Lipschitz-inverse perturbation result and no notion of strong approximation. The mission produces both, together with the formal Theorem 3.2 that a follow-on mission (Theorem 3.3, Corollary 3.4, §4) would reference.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, differentiate and invert, is unavailable: fff need not have a derivative anywhere near x0x_0x0​, so neither Mathlib's implicit-function theorem nor its inverse-function theorem applies. The difficulty is to obtain surjectivity of F(⋅,y)F(\cdot, y)F(⋅,y) onto a ball uniformly in yyy from information about fff alone. Injectivity transfers directly from fff through the small Lipschitz modulus of F(⋅,y)−fF(\cdot, y) - fF(⋅,y)−f; surjectivity does not, because fff carries no information about F(⋅,y)F(\cdot, y)F(⋅,y) beyond the small Lipschitz modulus of the difference, and the domain ball, the image ball and the parameter neighborhood must be chosen once for all yyy. Completeness of XXX is essential (the paper stresses this on p. 306) and is not available for YYY and ZZZ.

Formalization scope

All statements live in namespace RobinsonNSIFT.Implicit. Committed conventions:

  • Scalars are real; XXX is a complete normed space ([CompleteSpace X]); YYY, ZZZ are normed spaces without completeness. Lemma 3.1's domain is a complete metric space, not a normed one.
  • δ(f,S)\delta(f, S)δ(f,S) via lower bounds. Every statement takes a real ddd with ExpansionAtLeast f S d in place of "d=δ(f,S)d = \delta(f,S)d=δ(f,S)", universally quantified. This is equivalent to the paper's statements and avoids a real infimum that would be 000 on sets with fewer than two points.
  • Total functions. FFF is a curried total function F : X → Y → Z and f:X→Zf : X \to Zf:X→Z; hypotheses constrain them on Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H only, and the conclusions keep the implicit function inside the domain: U⊆ΞU \subseteq \XiU⊆Ξ, V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H, x(V)⊆Ux(V) \subseteq Ux(V)⊆U. This makes explicit what the paper leaves implicit (its FFF is only defined on Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H). Likewise Ω⊆Ξ\Omega \subseteq \XiΩ⊆Ξ, used implicitly in the paper's proof, is a conclusion of milestone 2.
  • Closed balls (Metric.closedBall), radii δ−1α\delta^{-1}\alphaδ−1α written α / δ; neighborhoods are filter members ∈ 𝓝 _, not necessarily open; Lipschitz moduli are ℝ≥0 and Lipschitz conditions are LipschitzOnWith on the stated set.
  • Lemma 3.1 keeps the paper's hypothesis that Ω\OmegaΩ is open, although Theorem 3.2's proof applies it to a closed ball.
  • Milestone 2 states as an existence claim, for every ε∈(0,d0)\varepsilon \in (0, d_0)ε∈(0,d0​), the choices the paper makes at the start of its proof.

A formalization in which hypothesis (a) is the weak approximation of Definition 2.1 (only at y=y0y = y_0y=y0​), in which VVV may shrink to {y0}\{y_0\}{y0​}, λ\lambdaλ is existential, or uniqueness is asserted outside Ξ\XiΞ, would be a different and trivial or false statement; the statements here rule these out.

Needed infrastructure: the contraction mapping principle on a closed subset of a complete space (Mathlib's ContractingWith), Lipschitz estimates on sets, and the two definitions of this mission. Lemma 3.1 is reusable for any Lipschitz-perturbation argument. Proofs of either milestone, or a direct proof of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(2), 1991, 292–309. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.2.292
  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly Regular Generalized Equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 1980, 43–62. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • A. V. Dmitruk, A. A. Milyutin, N. P. Osmolovskii, Lyusternik's theorem and the theory of extrema, Russian Mathematical Surveys 1980, No. 6, 11–51 (as cited in Robinson 1991, p. 298).
  • L. V. Kantorovich, G. P. Akilov, Functional Analysis, cited in Robinson 1991 as [17].
4 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1: With Bounded Constraint Sets the Two-Stage Stochastic Convex Program Satisfies min P = sup DResearch Paper

Motivation

A two-stage stochastic program with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision is fixed before a random outcome is observed, and a second-stage (recourse) decision is chosen after the outcome is known, both subject to constraints and both incurring costs. The model is the standard framework for planning under uncertainty in operations research: capacity planning, production and inventory, energy dispatch, finance.

For linear recourse problems, duality was developed in the 1960s and early 1970s by Wets and others, partly under integrability restrictions on the random data. R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976), doi:10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173), treat the convex case, where every cost and constraint function is convex, by embedding the problem in a family of perturbed problems and applying the perturbational theory of convex duality (Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, SIAM 1974) together with the theory of convex integral functionals. The paper's dual variables are integrable price systems, interpreted as equilibrium prices for perturbations of the constraints; it is the starting point of a series of papers by the same authors on stochastic convex programming (relatively complete recourse, Kuhn–Tucker conditions, singular multipliers).

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. A vector x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​ is chosen subject to x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤0f_{1i}(x_1)\le 0f1i​(x1​)≤0 (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), at cost f10(x1)f_{10}(x_1)f10​(x1​). Then s∈Ss\in Ss∈S is observed and x2(s)∈Rn2x_2(s)\in\mathbb R^{n_2}x2​(s)∈Rn2​ is chosen subject to x2(s)∈C2x_2(s)\in C_2x2​(s)∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2(s))≤0f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\le 0f2i​(s,x1​,x2​(s))≤0 (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), at cost f20(s,x1,x2(s))f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s)). The aim is to minimize the expected cost

f10(x1)+∫Sf20(s,x1,x2(s)) σ(ds).f_{10}(x_1)+\int_S f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2(s))\,\sigma(ds).f10​(x1​)+∫S​f20​(s,x1​,x2​(s))σ(ds).

The standing assumptions are: C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ convex, closed and nonempty; f1if_{1i}f1i​ and f2i(s,⋅,⋅)f_{2i}(s,\cdot,\cdot)f2i​(s,⋅,⋅) convex and finite everywhere; s↦f2i(s,x1,x2)s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)s↦f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge 1i≥1.

Decisions live in X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​ and perturbations in U=Rm1×Lm2∞U=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{m_2}U=Rm1​×Lm2​∞​. The perturbation functional F(x,u)F(x,u)F(x,u) is the expected cost if xxx satisfies the constraints with right-hand sides u1u_1u1​ and, almost surely, u2(s)u_2(s)u2​(s), and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. The problem P\mathbf PP minimizes F(x,0)F(x,0)F(x,0).

The space Y=Rm1×Lm21Y=\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{m_2}Y=Rm1​×Lm2​1​ is paired with UUU by ⟨u,y⟩=u1⋅y1+∫Su2(s)⋅y2(s) σ(ds)\langle u,y\rangle=u_1\cdot y_1+\int_S u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)\,\sigma(ds)⟨u,y⟩=u1​⋅y1​+∫S​u2​(s)⋅y2​(s)σ(ds), and V=Rn1×Ln21V=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^1_{n_2}V=Rn1​×Ln2​1​ with XXX in the same way. The Lagrangian is L(x,y)=inf⁡u∈U{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}L(x,y)=\inf_{u\in U}\{\langle u,y\rangle+F(x,u)\}L(x,y)=infu∈U​{⟨u,y⟩+F(x,u)}, the dual D\mathbf DD maximizes g(y)=inf⁡x∈XL(x,y)g(y)=\inf_{x\in X}L(x,y)g(y)=infx∈X​L(x,y) over y∈Yy\in Yy∈Y, and the perturbation function is φ(u)=inf⁡x∈XF(x,u)\varphi(u)=\inf_{x\in X}F(x,u)φ(u)=infx∈X​F(x,u). Conjugates φ∗\varphi^*φ∗, φ∗∗\varphi^{**}φ∗∗ are taken with respect to the pairing of UUU with YYY.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

If C1C_1C1​ and C2C_2C2​ are bounded, then

min⁡P=sup⁡D>−∞,\min\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf D>-\infty,minP=supD>−∞,

and in fact φ\varphiφ is a proper convex function on UUU, lower semicontinuous for the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), the infimum defining φ(u)\varphi(u)φ(u) is attained for every u∈Uu\in Uu∈U, and φ∗∗=φ\varphi^{**}=\varphiφ∗∗=φ. The goal is the theorem exactly as printed, all conclusions included.

Milestones

  1. p. 174: for bounded measurable x1(⋅)x_1(\cdot)x1​(⋅), x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), the functions s↦f2i(s,x1(s),x2(s))s\mapsto f_{2i}(s,x_1(s),x_2(s))s↦f2i​(s,x1​(s),x2​(s)) are measurable, summable for i=0i=0i=0 and essentially bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1.
  2. Proposition 3: FFF is convex, not identically +∞+\infty+∞, and lower semicontinuous on X×UX\times UX×U for the norm topology and for the weak topology induced by V×YV\times YV×Y.
  3. (4.9): with C1,C2C_1,C_2C1​,C2​ bounded, X0={x:x1∈C1, x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0=\{x: x_1\in C_1,\ x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0​={x:x1​∈C1​, x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is weakly compact in XXX, and X0′={x2∈Ln2∞:x2(s)∈C2 a.s.}X_0'=\{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}: x_2(s)\in C_2\text{ a.s.}\}X0′​={x2​∈Ln2​∞​:x2​(s)∈C2​ a.s.} is compact in σ(Ln2∞,Ln21)\sigma(\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2},\mathcal L^1_{n_2})σ(Ln2​∞​,Ln2​1​).
  4. (4.1): g(y)=inf⁡u{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y)g(y)=\inf_{u}\{\langle u,y\rangle+\varphi(u)\}=-\varphi^*(-y)g(y)=infu​{⟨u,y⟩+φ(u)}=−φ∗(−y).
  5. (4.2): φ∗∗(0)=sup⁡D\varphi^{**}(0)=\sup\mathbf Dφ∗∗(0)=supD.

The mission also poses the explicit form (1.8) of the Lagrangian and Corollary 1 (dual solutions are the negatives of subgradients of φ\varphiφ at 000; saddle-point characterization of primal solutions when ∂φ(0)≠∅\partial\varphi(0)\ne\emptyset∂φ(0)=∅).

Significance

Theorem 3 gives, for bounded constraint sets, the absence of a duality gap between a convex recourse problem with essentially bounded decisions and its Lagrangian dual over integrable multipliers, together with existence of an optimal decision. Through Corollary 1 it reduces the necessity of the Kuhn–Tucker (saddle-point) optimality conditions to the single question whether ∂φ(0)\partial\varphi(0)∂φ(0) is nonempty, and through the paper's later results it describes the directional derivatives of the optimal value with respect to perturbations of the constraints.

The result has been proved since 1976; it has not been machine-checked. A formal development produces the problem model on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ and L1\mathcal L^1L1 spaces, the weak topologies of the pairings, and conjugate duality for extended-real-valued functions on such paired spaces, none of which is currently available as a ready-made Lean statement on this platform.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two points. First, inf⁡P=sup⁡D\inf\mathbf P=\sup\mathbf DinfP=supD is φ(0)=φ∗∗(0)\varphi(0)=\varphi^{**}(0)φ(0)=φ∗∗(0), and the biconjugate equals φ\varphiφ only for a lower semicontinuous proper convex function in a topology compatible with the pairing. Lower semicontinuity of φ\varphiφ in the norm topology of UUU is not enough: the pairing is with L1\mathcal L^1L1, not with the norm dual of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞, so the relevant topology is the weak topology σ(U,Y)\sigma(U,Y)σ(U,Y), and an infimum of lower semicontinuous functions is in general not lower semicontinuous. Second, the lower semicontinuity of FFF itself, in the weak topology, is a statement about convex integral functionals on L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ that rests on measurability of the integrands in sss jointly with continuity in the decision variables. Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is what supplies the compactness that is otherwise missing.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ and the products u1⋅y1u_1\cdot y_1u1​⋅y1​, u2(s)⋅y2(s)u_2(s)\cdot y_2(s)u2​(s)⋅y2​(s) are dot products. Constraint indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m.
  • Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Ln1\mathcal L^1_nLn1​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) ⊤ σ and Lp (Fin n → ℝ) 1 σ, spaces of almost-everywhere classes; all second-stage conditions are stated almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure (IsProbabilityMeasure).
  • Values in R∪{±∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}R∪{±∞} are EReal; infima and suprema are lattice operations in EReal, so there are no junk values for empty or unbounded sets. Every sum has a real first summand, so no ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ convention enters.
  • The expected cost is a real Bochner integral; its integrand is summable for x2∈L∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\inftyx2​∈L∞ (milestone 1), so it is the true expected cost. No extended-real-valued function is ever integrated.
  • A weak topology "induced by the pairing" is the coarsest topology making every functional of the pairing continuous; the product weak topology on X×UX\times UX×U is the product of the two. These are passed explicitly. Replacing them by the norm topologies would make the lower semicontinuity statements strictly weaker and the compactness statement false; such a formalization does not count.
  • An extended-real function is convex when its epigraph is convex, and proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is somewhere finite.
  • Boundedness of C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​ is assumed exactly where the paper assumes it: Theorem 3, (4.9) and Corollary 1.

A complete development needs the identification of L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ with the dual of L1\mathcal L^1L1 on a probability space (for weak-* compactness), lower semicontinuity of convex integral functionals, and conjugate duality on paired locally convex spaces. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of milestones, and of auxiliary lemmas of this kind as separate theorems, are welcome. The mission Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2 formalizes the paper's other main result, on the first-stage problem and attainment of the recourse.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, II, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 39(2) (1971) 439–469. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1971.39.439
  • R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic programs with fixed recourse: the equivalent deterministic program, SIAM Review 16(3) (1974) 309–339. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations I: Implicit-Function Theorem — the Solution x(p) of 0 ∈ f(p, x) + ∂ψ_C(x) Is Locally Unique with ‖x(p) − x(q)‖ ≤ (λ + ε)‖f(p, x(q)) − f(q, x(q))‖Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems of optimization and equilibrium can be written as one inclusion. Some examples are the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker conditions of a nonlinear program, nonlinear complementarity problems, variational inequalities and the equilibrium conditions of economic and traffic models. In each of them a point xxx has to satisfy 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x). In applications the data fff depend on parameters: estimated coefficients, prices, or the iterate of an algorithm. One then wants to know whether a solution persists under a perturbation of the parameter, whether it stays locally unique, and how fast it moves. For a smooth equation f(p,x)=0f(p, x) = 0f(p,x)=0 the classical implicit-function theorem answers all three questions. Inequality constraints make the solution set nonsmooth, and the classical theorem no longer applies.

S. M. Robinson's paper Strongly regular generalized equations (Math. Oper. Res. 5 (1980) 43–62) introduced the condition of strong regularity and proved an implicit-function theorem for generalized equations under it. The condition and the theorem became the starting point of the stability theory of variational inequalities and nonlinear programs. Later work characterises strong regularity for nonlinear programs (Robinson's own §4, through the strong second-order sufficient condition), and develops it in the theory of metric regularity and of single-valued Lipschitz localisations (Dontchev–Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, Springer 2009/2014). Its sensitivity results underlie the convergence analysis of Newton and sequential quadratic programming methods for these problems.

This mission formalizes §1–§2 of the paper: the definition, the implicit-function theorem (Theorem 2.1) with its proof, and the three results derived from it.

Setting

Let XXX be a real normed linear space and X′X'X′ its topological dual, the continuous linear functionals on XXX. Let C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X be closed and convex. The normal-cone operator of CCC is

∂ψC(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},x∈C,∅,x∉C.\partial\psi_C(x) = \begin{cases} \{y \in X' : y(c - x) \le 0 \text{ for all } c \in C\}, & x \in C, \\ \emptyset, & x \notin C. \end{cases}∂ψC​(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},∅,​x∈C,x∈/C.​

A generalized equation is the inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x), for a function fff from an open set Ω⊆X\Omega \subseteq XΩ⊆X to X′X'X′. For C=XC = XC=X it is the equation f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0. For CCC the nonnegative orthant of Rn\mathbb R^nRn it is the nonlinear complementarity problem. For a general closed convex CCC it is the variational inequality over CCC.

Let x0∈Ωx_0 \in \Omegax0​∈Ω solve the generalized equation, and let fff be Fréchet differentiable at x0x_0x0​. Linearising fff gives the multifunction

Tx=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x).T x = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x).Tx=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x).

The generalized equation is strongly regular at x0x_0x0​ with associated Lipschitz constant λ\lambdaλ if there are neighbourhoods UUU of 000 in X′X'X′ and VVV of x0x_0x0​ with the following property: for every y∈Uy \in Uy∈U the inclusion y∈Txy \in Txy∈Tx has exactly one solution s(y)s(y)s(y) in VVV, and ∥s(y1)−s(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥\|s(y_1) - s(y_2)\| \le \lambda \|y_1 - y_2\|∥s(y1​)−s(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ on UUU. The condition depends only on f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) and CCC.

In the parametric problem the function is f(p,x)f(p, x)f(p,x), with ppp in a topological space PPP and base point p0p_0p0​. Its partial derivative in xxx is f′(p,x)f'(p, x)f′(p,x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (p. 45)

Assume that f′f'f′ exists on P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω, that fff and f′f'f′ are continuous at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), and that x0x_0x0​ solves 0∈f(p0,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p_0, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p0​,x)+∂ψC​(x), strongly regularly with constant λ\lambdaλ. Then for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there are neighbourhoods NεN_\varepsilonNε​ of p0p_0p0​ and WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of x0x_0x0​, and a function x:Nε→Wεx : N_\varepsilon \to W_\varepsilonx:Nε​→Wε​, with two properties. First, x(p)x(p)x(p) is the unique solution in WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of 0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC​(x). Second,

∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε) ∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε).\|x(p) - x(q)\| \le (\lambda + \varepsilon)\,\|f(p, x(q)) - f(q, x(q))\| \qquad (p, q \in N_\varepsilon).∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε)∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε​).

Milestones: the steps of the proof (p. 46)

Write LLL for the linearisation at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), r(p,x)=f(p0,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)−f(p,x)r(p, x) = f(p_0, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) - f(p, x)r(p,x)=f(p0​,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)−f(p,x) for the residual, and Φp(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]\Phi_p(x) = V \cap L^{-1}[r(p, x)]Φp​(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]. The milestones are four claims of the proof:

  1. On the closed ball VεV_\varepsilonVε​, the fixed points of Φp\Phi_pΦp​ are exactly the solutions of the perturbed inclusion.
  2. ∥Φp(x1)−Φp(x2)∥≤λδ∥x1−x2∥\|\Phi_p(x_1) - \Phi_p(x_2)\| \le \lambda\delta \|x_1 - x_2\|∥Φp​(x1​)−Φp​(x2​)∥≤λδ∥x1​−x2​∥ on VεV_\varepsilonVε​.
  3. Φp\Phi_pΦp​ maps VεV_\varepsilonVε​ into itself.
  4. The contraction principle on VεV_\varepsilonVε​, with the bound ∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp(x)−x∥\|x(p) - x\| \le (1 - \lambda\delta)^{-1} \|\Phi_p(x) - x\|∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp​(x)−x∥ (2.5).

Companion results

  • Corollary 2.2 (pp. 46–47). If PPP lies in a normed space and ∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥\|f(p, x) - f(q, x)\| \le \nu \|p - q\|∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥, then x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) is Lipschitzian with modulus ν(λ+ε)\nu(\lambda + \varepsilon)ν(λ+ε).
  • Theorem 2.3 (p. 47). Let Φp(x0)\Phi_p(x_0)Φp​(x0​) be the unique local solution of the linear generalized equation 0∈f(p,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x). Then ∥x(p)−Φp(x0)∥≤αε(p)∥p−p0∥\|x(p) - \Phi_p(x_0)\| \le \alpha_\varepsilon(p)\|p - p_0\|∥x(p)−Φp​(x0​)∥≤αε​(p)∥p−p0​∥, with αε(p)→0\alpha_\varepsilon(p) \to 0αε​(p)→0.
  • Theorem 2.4 (p. 48). This is a perturbation lemma for linear generalized equations 0∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x)0 \in Ax + a + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x). Near (A0,a0)(A_0, a_0)(A0​,a0​) the localised inverse stays single-valued, and it is Lipschitzian with modulus λ(1−λ∥A−A0∥)−1\lambda(1 - \lambda\|A - A_0\|)^{-1}λ(1−λ∥A−A0​∥)−1.
  • The case C=XC = XC=X (remark on p. 45). There strong regularity is equivalent to f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) having a continuous linear inverse.
  • Strong regularity is the weakest possible condition (remark on p. 47). For the canonical perturbation f(p,x)=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)−pf(p,x) = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) - pf(p,x)=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)−p, p∈X′p \in X'p∈X′, locally unique solvability with a Lipschitzian solution map x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) near p0=0p_0 = 0p0​=0 is exactly strong regularity at x0x_0x0​.

Significance

Theorem 2.1 reduces the stability of a nonsmooth problem to a property of one linearised problem at the base point. Once strong regularity is checked at x0x_0x0​, the solution exists, is locally unique and moves in a Lipschitz manner for every nearby parameter. Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 make this quantitative. Theorem 2.3 shows that a linear complementarity problem or a quadratic program approximates the nonlinear solution to first order. Theorem 2.4 is the analogue of Banach's perturbation lemma, which keeps an operator invertible under small perturbations. The later sections of the paper give checkable criteria for strong regularity: a Schur-complement test, a reduced-form test over polyhedral sets, and second-order conditions for nonlinear programs. Those criteria are the subject of the companion missions II–IV.

The theorems have been proved since 1980 and have been restated in textbooks. No machine-checked version of strong regularity or of this implicit-function theorem is known. Mathlib has the classical implicit- and inverse-function theorems for C1C^1C1 maps between Banach spaces, and the contraction mapping principle. It has nothing on normal-cone operators, generalized equations or Lipschitz localisations. The formalization adds this layer. It also shows that Theorem 2.1 needs no completeness of XXX.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to apply the classical implicit-function theorem. It fails because x↦f(x)+∂ψC(x)x \mapsto f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)x↦f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is set-valued and is not differentiable in any useful sense. The inverse is localised only to a neighbourhood VVV and is single-valued only there. So every step must keep the iterates inside sets on which strong regularity says something. The neighbourhoods have to be chosen in the right order: δ\deltaδ from ε\varepsilonε, then UUU and VVV, then the ball radius ρ\rhoρ, then the parameter neighbourhood. The estimate (2.4) has to come out with the constant λ+ε\lambda + \varepsilonλ+ε and no larger. The page applies the contraction principle in a space it calls only normed. A faithful proof must also obtain the fixed point without completeness of XXX, for example through the completeness of X′X'X′.

Formalization scope

  • X′X'X′ is StrongDual ℝ X, the normal cone is a Set (StrongDual ℝ X) that is empty off CCC, and an inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is written −f(x)∈∂ψC(x)-f(x) \in \partial\psi_C(x)−f(x)∈∂ψC​(x).
  • Strong regularity is a predicate on (C,f(x0),f′(x0),x0,λ)(C, f(x_0), f'(x_0), x_0, \lambda)(C,f(x0​),f′(x0​),x0​,λ) with real λ\lambdaλ. It requires existence, uniqueness in VVV and the Lipschitz bound.
  • fff is a total function P×X→X′P \times X \to X'P×X→X′ whose values off P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω carry no hypothesis. The conclusion therefore asserts Wε⊆ΩW_\varepsilon \subseteq \OmegaWε​⊆Ω.
  • Differentiability is HasFDerivAt at every point of Ω\OmegaΩ, for every ppp. Continuity of f′f'f′ at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​) is joint and in operator norm.
  • Uniqueness is uniqueness within WεW_\varepsilonWε​, never global. Global uniqueness is false in general. Dropping uniqueness, or quantifying ε\varepsilonε after the neighbourhoods, would trivialize the goal, and the statements are written to exclude both.
  • Theorem 2.1, Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 do not assume completeness, as printed. Theorem 2.4 assumes a Banach space, as printed.
  • The contraction-principle milestone assumes completeness, under which the principle as invoked holds.
  • Corollary 2.2 asks for its Lipschitz hypothesis on Nε×VεN_\varepsilon \times V_\varepsilonNε​×Vε​, sets that Theorem 2.1 produces. It is therefore stated on fixed neighbourhoods given in advance.
  • Theorem 2.4 also asserts λ∥A−A0∥<1\lambda\|A - A_0\| < 1λ∥A−A0​∥<1, which its proof secures.

A complete development needs the following:

  • the mean-value inequality for Fréchet-differentiable maps on convex sets;
  • the contraction principle on a closed ball;
  • a fixed-point argument that obtains the fixed point through the complete space X′X'X′.

The definitions of normal cone and strong regularity are reusable for variational inequalities in general. Contributions are welcome at any level: proofs of the milestones, the goal from the milestones, or the companion results from the goal.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly regular generalized equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1):43–62, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • A. L. Dontchev and R. T. Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, 2nd ed., Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Rates for the Regularized Least-Squares Algorithm I: With λ Tuned to the Effective Dimension, Regularized Least Squares Attains the Rate ℓ^(−bc/(bc+1)) Uniformly over P(b, c) (Theorem 1)Research Paper

Motivation

Regularized least squares (RLS, also called kernel ridge regression or Tikhonov regularization) is the simplest learning algorithm built on a reproducing kernel Hilbert space. Given ℓ\ellℓ examples (xi,yi)(x_i,y_i)(xi​,yi​) drawn independently from an unknown distribution ρ\rhoρ, it returns the function in a hypothesis space H\mathcal HH that minimizes the empirical squared error plus λ\lambdaλ times the squared norm. It is used in regression, in multi-task learning with vector-valued outputs, and as the reference case for spectral regularization methods.

The basic statistical question is how fast the excess risk of the RLS estimator goes to zero as ℓ\ellℓ grows, and how to choose λ=λℓ\lambda=\lambda_\ellλ=λℓ​ to get that speed. Caponnetto and De Vito (FoCM 2007) answered it for a family of priors P(b,c)\mathcal P(b,c)P(b,c) described by two numbers: the decay rate bbb of the eigenvalues of the covariance operator of the input distribution and the regularity ccc of the target function. Their Theorem 1 gives the upper rate ℓ−bc/(bc+1)\ell^{-bc/(bc+1)}ℓ−bc/(bc+1); Theorems 2 and 3 show that no algorithm does better when the output space is finite dimensional. This mission formalizes the upper rate.

Timeline. Cucker and Smale (2002) and De Vito, Caponnetto and Rosasco (2005) gave rates for RLS that did not depend on the eigenvalue decay of ρX\rho_XρX​. Zhang (2005) introduced the effective dimension N(λ)\mathcal N(\lambda)N(λ) as the complexity measure. Caponnetto and De Vito (authors' copy dated 2006, published 2007) combined it with a source condition to obtain rates that are optimal over P(b,c)\mathcal P(b,c)P(b,c), for vector-valued outputs. Steinwart, Hush and Scovel (2009) and Fischer and Steinwart (2020) later extended the analysis to other norms and to c<1c<1c<1.

Setting

The input space XXX is a Polish space and the output space YYY is a real separable Hilbert space. The hypothesis space H\mathcal HH is a real separable Hilbert space of functions f:X→Yf:X\to Yf:X→Y in which evaluation at each point is continuous. For x∈Xx\in Xx∈X, Kx:Y→HK_x:Y\to\mathcal HKx​:Y→H is the adjoint of evaluation at xxx, so f(x)=Kx∗ff(x)=K_x^*ff(x)=Kx∗​f. Hypothesis 1 adds a measurability condition and a uniform trace bound Tr⁡(Kx∗Kx)≤κ\operatorname{Tr}(K_x^*K_x)\le\kappaTr(Kx∗​Kx​)≤κ.

A distribution ρ\rhoρ on Z=X×YZ=X\times YZ=X×Y has marginal ρX\rho_XρX​ and conditional laws ρ(⋅∣x)\rho(\cdot\mid x)ρ(⋅∣x). The expected risk of f∈Hf\in\mathcal Hf∈H is E[f]=∫∥f(x)−y∥Y2 dρ\mathcal E[f]=\int\|f(x)-y\|_Y^2\,d\rhoE[f]=∫∥f(x)−y∥Y2​dρ. Hypothesis 2 asks that E∥y∥2<∞\mathbb E\|y\|^2<\inftyE∥y∥2<∞, that E\mathcal EE attains its infimum over H\mathcal HH at some fHf_{\mathcal H}fH​ (the minimizer of minimal norm is used), and that the noise y−fH(x)y-f_{\mathcal H}(x)y−fH​(x) satisfies a Bernstein moment condition with constants M,ΣM,\SigmaM,Σ.

The covariance operator T=∫XKxKx∗ dρXT=\int_XK_xK_x^*\,d\rho_XT=∫X​Kx​Kx∗​dρX​ is positive and trace class, with ⟨Tf,f⟩H=∫X∥f(x)∥Y2 dρX\langle Tf,f\rangle_{\mathcal H}=\int_X\|f(x)\|_Y^2\,d\rho_X⟨Tf,f⟩H​=∫X​∥f(x)∥Y2​dρX​ and eigen-decomposition T=∑ntn⟨⋅,en⟩enT=\sum_nt_n\langle\cdot,e_n\rangle e_nT=∑n​tn​⟨⋅,en​⟩en​, t1≥t2≥⋯>0t_1\ge t_2\ge\dots>0t1​≥t2​≥⋯>0. The prior P(b,c)\mathcal P(b,c)P(b,c), for 1<b<∞1<b<\infty1<b<∞ and 1≤c≤21\le c\le21≤c≤2, consists of the ρ\rhoρ satisfying Hypothesis 2, with fH=T(c−1)/2gf_{\mathcal H}=T^{(c-1)/2}gfH​=T(c−1)/2g for some ∥g∥2≤R\|g\|^2\le R∥g∥2≤R (source condition), and with α≤nbtn≤β\alpha\le n^bt_n\le\betaα≤nbtn​≤β for all nnn (eigenvalue decay).

The RLS estimator fzλf_{\mathbf z}^\lambdafzλ​ minimizes 1ℓ∑i∥f(xi)−yi∥Y2+λ∥f∥H2\frac1\ell\sum_i\|f(x_i)-y_i\|_Y^2+\lambda\|f\|_{\mathcal H}^2ℓ1​∑i​∥f(xi​)−yi​∥Y2​+λ∥f∥H2​ over H\mathcal HH.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1, 1<b<+∞1<b<+\infty1<b<+∞

With λℓ=ℓ−b/(bc+1)\lambda_\ell=\ell^{-b/(bc+1)}λℓ​=ℓ−b/(bc+1) and aℓ=ℓ−bc/(bc+1)a_\ell=\ell^{-bc/(bc+1)}aℓ​=ℓ−bc/(bc+1) for c>1c>1c>1, and λℓ=aℓ=(log⁡ℓ/ℓ)b/(b+1)\lambda_\ell=a_\ell=(\log\ell/\ell)^{b/(b+1)}λℓ​=aℓ​=(logℓ/ℓ)b/(b+1) for c=1c=1c=1,

lim⁡τ→∞lim sup⁡ℓ→∞sup⁡ρ∈P(b,c)Pz∼ρℓ[E[fzλℓ]−E[fH]>τaℓ]=0.\lim_{\tau\to\infty}\limsup_{\ell\to\infty}\sup_{\rho\in\mathcal P(b,c)}\mathbb P_{\mathbf z\sim\rho^\ell}\Big[\mathcal E[f_{\mathbf z}^{\lambda_\ell}]-\mathcal E[f_{\mathcal H}]>\tau a_\ell\Big]=0.τ→∞lim​ℓ→∞limsup​ρ∈P(b,c)sup​Pz∼ρℓ​[E[fzλℓ​​]−E[fH​]>τaℓ​]=0.

The statement fixes the rate, not the constants: the threshold τ\tauτ absorbs every constant of the prior.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 1 iii)–v): the excess risk is ∥T(f−fH)∥2\|\sqrt T(f-f_{\mathcal H})\|^2∥T​(f−fH​)∥2; the regularized expected and empirical risks have unique minimizers fλ=(T+λ)−1TfHf^\lambda=(T+\lambda)^{-1}Tf_{\mathcal H}fλ=(T+λ)−1TfH​ and fzλ=(Tx+λ)−1gzf_{\mathbf z}^\lambda=(T_{\mathbf x}+\lambda)^{-1}g_{\mathbf z}fzλ​=(Tx​+λ)−1gz​.
  2. Proposition 2: a Bernstein inequality for means of i.i.d. Hilbert-space-valued variables.
  3. Theorem 4: with probability ≥1−η\ge1-\eta≥1−η,
E[fzλ]−E[fH]≤3Cη(A(λ)+κ2B(λ)ℓ2λ+κA(λ)ℓλ+κM2ℓ2λ+Σ2N(λ)ℓ),\mathcal E[f_{\mathbf z}^\lambda]-\mathcal E[f_{\mathcal H}]\le3C_\eta\Big(\mathcal A(\lambda)+\frac{\kappa^2\mathcal B(\lambda)}{\ell^2\lambda}+\frac{\kappa\mathcal A(\lambda)}{\ell\lambda}+\frac{\kappa M^2}{\ell^2\lambda}+\frac{\Sigma^2\mathcal N(\lambda)}{\ell}\Big),E[fzλ​]−E[fH​]≤3Cη​(A(λ)+ℓ2λκ2B(λ)​+ℓλκA(λ)​+ℓ2λκM2​+ℓΣ2N(λ)​),

provided ℓ≥2CηκN(λ)/λ\ell\ge2C_\eta\kappa\mathcal N(\lambda)/\lambdaℓ≥2Cη​κN(λ)/λ and λ≤∥T∥\lambda\le\|T\|λ≤∥T∥, where Cη=32log⁡2(6/η)C_\eta=32\log^2(6/\eta)Cη​=32log2(6/η), A(λ)=E[fλ]−E[fH]\mathcal A(\lambda)=\mathcal E[f^\lambda]-\mathcal E[f_{\mathcal H}]A(λ)=E[fλ]−E[fH​], B(λ)=∥fλ−fH∥2\mathcal B(\lambda)=\|f^\lambda-f_{\mathcal H}\|^2B(λ)=∥fλ−fH​∥2 and N(λ)=Tr⁡[(T+λ)−1T]\mathcal N(\lambda)=\operatorname{Tr}[(T+\lambda)^{-1}T]N(λ)=Tr[(T+λ)−1T]. 4. Proposition 3: on P(b,c)\mathcal P(b,c)P(b,c), A(λ)≤λc∥T(1−c)/2fH∥2\mathcal A(\lambda)\le\lambda^c\|T^{(1-c)/2}f_{\mathcal H}\|^2A(λ)≤λc∥T(1−c)/2fH​∥2, B(λ)≤λc−1∥T(1−c)/2fH∥2\mathcal B(\lambda)\le\lambda^{c-1}\|T^{(1-c)/2}f_{\mathcal H}\|^2B(λ)≤λc−1∥T(1−c)/2fH​∥2 and N(λ)≤bb−1β1/bλ−1/b\mathcal N(\lambda)\le\frac b{b-1}\beta^{1/b}\lambda^{-1/b}N(λ)≤b−1b​β1/bλ−1/b.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 says that RLS with λℓ\lambda_\ellλℓ​ chosen from (b,c)(b,c)(b,c) achieves the rate ℓ−bc/(bc+1)\ell^{-bc/(bc+1)}ℓ−bc/(bc+1) uniformly over the prior, and the companion lower bounds show this is the minimax rate for 1<c≤21<c\le21<c≤2 and finite-dimensional YYY. The rate interpolates between the parametric rate 1/ℓ1/\ell1/ℓ (fast eigenvalue decay, smooth target) and slower nonparametric rates, and it identifies the effective dimension, rather than the dimension of H\mathcal HH, as the quantity that governs complexity. Theorem 4 is a non-asymptotic bound of independent use; it is the template for later analyses of spectral regularization, gradient descent with early stopping, and random-feature approximations of kernel methods.

The formalization. The result is proved on paper; no machine-checked proof of a kernel ridge regression rate is known to exist. A formal development requires a Bernstein inequality in Hilbert spaces, spectral calculus for a trace-class operator defined from a measure, and the operator-perturbation argument of Theorem 4. Two printed constants are corrected here: Theorem 4's proof yields 3Cη3C_\eta3Cη​, not CηC_\etaCη​, and Proposition 3's bound on N(λ)\mathcal N(\lambda)N(λ) has β1/b\beta^{1/b}β1/b in place of β\betaβ. The paper also states Theorem 1 for b=+∞b=+\inftyb=+∞; that branch fails for 1≤c<21\le c<21≤c<2 and is not posed.

Difficulty

The obvious argument bounds ∥fzλ−fλ∥H\|f_{\mathbf z}^\lambda-f^\lambda\|_{\mathcal H}∥fzλ​−fλ∥H​ by uniform concentration of TxT_{\mathbf x}Tx​ around TTT and multiplies by ∥T∥\|\sqrt T\|∥T​∥. That gives a variance term that ignores the eigenvalue decay of TTT, and hence a rate that does not improve with bbb. The optimal rate needs the variance measured through N(λ)\mathcal N(\lambda)N(λ), which requires controlling T(Tx+λ)−1\sqrt T(T_{\mathbf x}+\lambda)^{-1}T​(Tx​+λ)−1 in operator norm with high probability. This in turn needs concentration of (T+λ)−1/2(T−Tx)(T+\lambda)^{-1/2}(T-T_{\mathbf x})(T+λ)−1/2(T−Tx​) in Hilbert–Schmidt norm, and the condition ℓ≳N(λ)/λ\ell\gtrsim\mathcal N(\lambda)/\lambdaℓ≳N(λ)/λ under which the empirical operator is close enough to TTT. The noise is unbounded, so only the moment condition (9) is available, and the concentration step must use moment bounds rather than boundedness.

Formalization scope

H\mathcal HH is Mathlib's RKHS ℝ H X Y, and KxK_xKx​ is RKHS.kerFun H x. The trace in Hypothesis 1 is computed in a fixed Hilbert basis of YYY. ρX\rho_XρX​ is the first marginal and ρ(⋅∣x)\rho(\cdot\mid x)ρ(⋅∣x) is condKernel. The operator TTT is not built as an operator-valued integral. It enters through its quadratic form ∫⟨f(x),g(x)⟩ dρX\int\langle f(x),g(x)\rangle\,d\rho_X∫⟨f(x),g(x)⟩dρX​ and through an eigen-system (en,tn)(e_n,t_n)(en​,tn​), indexed from 000, so (17) reads α≤(n+1)btn≤β\alpha\le(n+1)^bt_n\le\betaα≤(n+1)btn​≤β. The effective dimension is ∑ntn/(tn+λ)\sum_nt_n/(t_n+\lambda)∑n​tn​/(tn​+λ). Samples are Fin ℓ → X × Y under the product measure, and probabilities of events are outer measures. "With probability at least 1−η1-\eta1−η" is stated as "the bad event has measure at most η\etaη". The noise condition and the moments of Proposition 2 are integrals of nonnegative functions with values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].

The hypotheses the paper uses but does not display are added: positivity of M,Σ,R,α,β,κM,\Sigma,R,\alpha,\beta,\kappaM,Σ,R,α,β,κ, and integrability of the random variable in Proposition 2. The RLS estimator of the goal is any family of minimizers of (18) for ℓ≥2\ell\ge2ℓ≥2; at ℓ=1\ell=1ℓ=1 and c=1c=1c=1 the parameter λ1=0\lambda_1=0λ1​=0 is degenerate. The goal quantifies uniformly: LLL is chosen before ρ\rhoρ, and the estimator is fixed before ρ\rhoρ. The goal must not be replaced by a statement about A,B,N\mathcal A,\mathcal B,\mathcal NA,B,N or by Theorem 4's event: it is the uniform rate for the estimator itself.

Reusable infrastructure: Hilbert-space Bernstein inequalities (Proposition 2 alone is a valuable target), spectral calculus for compact positive operators given by a quadratic form, and the representer/normal equation for vector-valued RLS. Contributions of proofs for any milestone, and of supporting lemmas about trace-class operators and effective dimension, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Caponnetto, E. De Vito, Optimal rates for the regularized least-squares algorithm, Found. Comput. Math. 7 (2007) 331–368. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-006-0196-8
  • F. Cucker, S. Smale, On the mathematical foundations of learning, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 39 (2002) 1–49. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0273-0979-01-00923-5
  • E. De Vito, A. Caponnetto, L. Rosasco, Model selection for regularized least-squares algorithm in learning theory, Found. Comput. Math. 5 (2005) 59–85. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-004-0134-1
  • T. Zhang, Learning bounds for kernel regression using effective data dimensionality, Neural Comput. 17 (2005) 2077–2098. https://doi.org/10.1162/0899766054323008
  • I. Pinelis, Optimum bounds for the distributions of martingales in Banach spaces, Ann. Probab. 22 (1994) 1679–1706. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176988477
  • I. Steinwart, D. Hush, C. Scovel, Optimal rates for regularized least squares regression, COLT 2009. https://www.cs.mcgill.ca/~colt2009/papers/038.pdf
  • S. Fischer, I. Steinwart, Sobolev norm learning rates for regularized least-squares algorithms, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 21 (2020) 1–38. https://jmlr.org/papers/v21/19-734.html
9 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: dbenbenn

Connes–Feldman–Weiss: an amenable equivalence relation is generated by a single transformationResearch Paper

This mission formalizes A. Connes, J. Feldman and B. Weiss, An amenable equivalence relation is generated by a single transformation, Ergodic Theory Dynam. Systems 1 (1981) 431–450 (doi:10.1017/S014338570000136X).

Motivation

A countable group acting on a measure space partitions it into countable orbits, and much of ergodic theory studies actions only through this orbit equivalence relation. The simplest relations are those of a single transformation, the orbits of an action of Z\mathbb ZZ. Connes, Feldman and Weiss characterize exactly which relations are of this kind, up to null sets: the amenable ones, those carrying an invariant mean. Since the orbit relation of any action of a countable amenable group is amenable, every such action is orbit equivalent to an action of Z\mathbb ZZ. The same theorem gives the uniqueness of Cartan subalgebras in hyperfinite von Neumann algebras.

On this platform it is the missing link in the Lodha–Moore mission, which passes between Lodha and Moore's definition of a μ\muμ-amenable relation (an orbit relation of Z\mathbb ZZ off a null set) and the invariant-mean definition of the Monod bundle: one direction is proved, the other (LodhaMoore.isMuAmenable_of_isAmenableRel) is this mission's goal in Lodha and Moore's language.

Timeline.

  • 1959, 1963: Dye proves orbit equivalence for measure-preserving actions of abelian groups and groups of polynomial growth (doi:10.2307/2372852, doi:10.2307/2373108).
  • 1976: Krieger classifies non-singular transformations up to orbit equivalence (doi:10.1007/BF01360278).
  • 1977: Feldman and Moore set up countable Borel equivalence relations and their von Neumann algebras (doi:10.1090/S0002-9947-1977-0578656-4).
  • 1978: Zimmer introduces amenable actions and shows that discrete subgroups act amenably on G/PG/PG/P for PPP amenable (doi:10.1016/0022-1236(78)90013-7).
  • 1980: Ornstein and Weiss prove that every measure-preserving action of a countable amenable group is orbit equivalent to an action of Z\mathbb ZZ (doi:10.1090/S0273-0979-1980-14702-3).
  • 1981: Connes, Feldman and Weiss prove it for every amenable non-singular countable equivalence relation, without a group.
  • 2004: Kechris and Miller give a detailed modern account in Topics in orbit equivalence (doi:10.1007/b99421).

Setting

XXX is a standard Borel space with a σ\sigmaσ-finite measure μ\muμ. A discrete measured equivalence relation (IsDiscreteMeasured μ R) is a Borel equivalence relation R⊆X×XR \subseteq X \times XR⊆X×X whose classes are countable and for which μ\muμ is quasi-invariant: the saturation R(A)={x∣∃y∈A,(x,y)∈R}R(A) = \{x \mid \exists y \in A, (x, y) \in R\}R(A)={x∣∃y∈A,(x,y)∈R} of a null Borel set AAA is null.

RRR carries the measure m=∫νx dμ(x)m = \int \nu^x\, d\mu(x)m=∫νxdμ(x), νx\nu^xνx the counting measure on the class of xxx (relMeasure), and the module δ\deltaδ, the density of mmm against its image under (x,y)↦(y,x)(x, y) \mapsto (y, x)(x,y)↦(y,x) (module). A partial transformation of RRR is a Borel bijection between Borel subsets of XXX whose graph lies in RRR (Monod.PartialTransformation).

RRR is amenable (Monod.IsAmenableRel) when it has a left invariant mean: a positive normalized map PPP from bounded functions on RRR to bounded functions on XXX with P(fϕ)=(Pf)ϕP(f^\phi) = (Pf)^\phiP(fϕ)=(Pf)ϕ for every partial transformation ϕ\phiϕ (Definitions 5–6). RRR is of type I (IsTypeI) when, off a null saturated set, its quotient is a standard Borel space, and hyperfinite (IsHyperfinite) when, off a null set, it is a countable increasing union of type I equivalence relations (Definition 1). A finite subequivalence relation (IsFiniteSubrelation) is a Borel T⊆RT \subseteq RT⊆R that is an equivalence relation with finite classes on T(0)={x∣(x,x)∈T}T^{(0)} = \{x \mid (x, x) \in T\}T(0)={x∣(x,x)∈T}.

Formalization targets

Goal (p. 431)

For RRR amenable there are a non-singular Borel automorphism TTT of XXX and a null set NNN with

(x,y)∈R  ⟺  ∃n∈Z, y=Tnx(x,y∉N).(x, y) \in R \iff \exists n \in \mathbb Z,\ y = T^n x \qquad (x, y \notin N).(x,y)∈R⟺∃n∈Z, y=Tnx(x,y∈/N).

Milestones

  • §1 (p. 434): the type I criterion; hyperfinite relations are those generated by one automorphism (Dye, external); subrelations of hyperfinite relations are hyperfinite.
  • §§2–3: Lemma 2 (disintegration over a finite subrelation), Feldman and Moore's Theorem 1 (external, as the proof of Lemma 3 applies it), Lemma 3 (bounded sets), Lemma 4 (local triviality).
  • §§5–6: Lemma 8 (the Følner condition), Lemma 9 (approximation by finite subrelations), Theorem 10 (hyperfinite if and only if amenable).
  • §7: Corollary 12, Corollary 13 (Vershik), and Corollary 14 with the amenability of the action it rests on (Zimmer, external).

Significance

The result. Theorem 10 turns amenability, which is usually easy to check, into hyperfiniteness, which is the structure one wants: for instance, the action of SL2(Z)\mathrm{SL}_2(\mathbb Z)SL2​(Z) on the projective line, or of any discrete group on G/PG/PG/P with PPP amenable, is generated by a single transformation. On this platform it closes the open direction, LodhaMoore.isMuAmenable_of_isAmenableRel, and with it Lodha and Moore's Theorem 2.1.

Formalizing it. No machine-checked proof of the theorem exists, in Mathlib or elsewhere as far as a search finds; Mathlib has no theory of countable Borel equivalence relations. A complete development builds that theory from the descriptive set theory Mathlib has.

Difficulty

The theorem is about relations without a group. The obvious route, through a countable group generating RRR and an amenability of that group, is unavailable: the orbit relation of a nonamenable group, such as SL2(Z)\mathrm{SL}_2(\mathbb Z)SL2​(Z) acting on the projective line, can be amenable, and there is no group whose Følner sets one could use. The Følner sets of Lemma 8 have to be produced from the invariant mean on the relation itself, which needs duality between L1L^1L1 and L∞L^\inftyL∞ and convexity arguments. Underneath, even the basic facts used in §§1–3 (that RRR is a countable union of graphs of Borel automorphisms, that mmm is a measure, that saturations of Borel sets are Borel) rest on the Lusin–Novikov uniformization theorem, which is not in Mathlib. It is published here as standalone theorems: a Borel set with countable sections is a countable union of Borel graphs, and a countable-to-one Borel map is injective on countably many Borel pieces covering its domain.

Formalization scope

All statements carry the hypotheses of §1: XXX standard Borel (StandardBorelSpace), μ\muμ σ\sigmaσ-finite, RRR a Borel equivalence relation with countable classes and μ\muμ quasi-invariant. Lemmas 8 and 9 take μ\muμ a probability measure, as the paper's proof of Lemma 9 does. “Up to a null set” is read as “off a μ\muμ-null Borel set of points”, which by quasi-invariance agrees with the paper's mmm-null sets. Amenability is the published Monod definition, an invariant mean on bounded measurable functions modulo null sets; it is not trivial (the relation of PSL2(A)\mathrm{PSL}_2(A)PSL2​(A) for a countable dense subring AAA of R\mathbb RR is not amenable, Monod.not_isAmenableRel_mob).

The definitions are in the definition bundle ConnesFeldmanWeiss. Reusable beyond this mission: the Feldman–Moore theorem and the basic theory of countable Borel equivalence relations, both welcome as standalone theorems.

What is left out. Proposition 7 and Corollary 11 need the von Neumann algebra of a relation and its Cartan subalgebras, which Mathlib does not have. The final part of the paper (Lemma 15 to Corollary 21) treats relations with uncountable classes through transverse functions, including foliations; it is a different setting with its own definitions.

Selected references

  • A. Connes, J. Feldman, B. Weiss, An amenable equivalence relation is generated by a single transformation, Ergodic Theory Dynam. Systems 1 (1981) 431–450. doi:10.1017/S014338570000136X
  • H. A. Dye, On groups of measure preserving transformations. I, Amer. J. Math. 81 (1959) 119–159. doi:10.2307/2372852
  • J. Feldman, C. C. Moore, Ergodic equivalence relations, cohomology, and von Neumann algebras. I, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 234 (1977) 289–324. doi:10.1090/S0002-9947-1977-0578656-4
  • R. J. Zimmer, Amenable ergodic group actions and an application to Poisson boundaries of random walks, J. Funct. Anal. 27 (1978) 350–372. doi:10.1016/0022-1236(78)90013-7
  • D. Ornstein, B. Weiss, Ergodic theory of amenable group actions. I: The Rohlin lemma, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 2 (1980) 161–164. doi:10.1090/S0273-0979-1980-14702-3
  • A. S. Kechris, B. D. Miller, Topics in orbit equivalence, Lecture Notes in Math. 1852, Springer, 2004. doi:10.1007/b99421
19 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Variational Principle II: Under Linearly Independent Active Constraint Gradients, a Bounded-Below Problem Has ε²-Optimal Feasible Points Satisfying the Lagrange Multiplier Rule up to εResearch Paper

Motivation

The classical Lagrange multiplier rule and its inequality-constrained form, the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker (KKT) conditions, are necessary conditions satisfied at a minimizer of a constrained problem. In finite dimensions, a continuous function bounded below on a closed bounded feasible set attains its minimum, so the rule describes an actual point. In an infinite-dimensional Banach space this fails: closed bounded sets are not compact, minimizing sequences need not converge, and a smooth function bounded below on a smooth constraint set can have no minimizer at all. The multiplier rule then has nothing to describe.

Ekeland's 1974 paper On the Variational Principle (DOI) introduced a principle (its Theorem 1.1) that replaces "a minimizer exists" with "near every almost-minimizer there is a point that strictly minimizes a slightly perturbed function". Section 3 of the paper uses this to prove that, for a problem with finitely many smooth equality and inequality constraints satisfying a linear-independence regularity condition, nearly optimal feasible points satisfy the KKT conditions up to a small error, with no compactness and no existence of a minimizer. This is the first appearance of what is now called an approximate or asymptotic KKT condition, a notion central to the convergence theory of nonlinear programming algorithms.

Setting

Let VVV be a real Banach space with dual V∗V^*V∗ (continuous linear functionals) and dual norm ∥x∗∥∗=sup⁡∥h∥≤1⟨x∗,h⟩\|x^*\|_*=\sup_{\|h\|\le1}\langle x^*,h\rangle∥x∗∥∗​=sup∥h∥≤1​⟨x∗,h⟩. Let F:V→RF:V\to\mathbb RF:V→R be Fréchet-differentiable, with derivative F′(v)∈V∗F'(v)\in V^*F′(v)∈V∗, and let G1,…,Gm:V→RG_1,\dots,G_m:V\to\mathbb RG1​,…,Gm​:V→R be C1C^1C1 (continuously Fréchet-differentiable). Fix 0≤p≤m0\le p\le m0≤p≤m and consider

inf⁡F(v)subject toGi(v)=0 (1≤i≤p),Gi(v)≥0 (p+1≤i≤m).(3.1)\inf F(v)\quad\text{subject to}\quad G_i(v)=0\ (1\le i\le p),\qquad G_i(v)\ge0\ (p+1\le i\le m). \tag{3.1}infF(v)subject toGi​(v)=0 (1≤i≤p),Gi​(v)≥0 (p+1≤i≤m).(3.1)

The feasible set is C={v∈V:Gi(v)=0 for i≤p, Gi(v)≥0 for i>p}\mathcal C=\{v\in V : G_i(v)=0 \text{ for } i\le p,\ G_i(v)\ge0 \text{ for } i>p\}C={v∈V:Gi​(v)=0 for i≤p, Gi​(v)≥0 for i>p} (3.2). At v∈Cv\in\mathcal Cv∈C the saturated constraints are I(v)={i:Gi(v)=0}I(v)=\{i : G_i(v)=0\}I(v)={i:Gi​(v)=0} (3.3). The regularity assumption (3.4) is: for every v∈Cv\in\mathcal Cv∈C, the derivatives Gi′(v)G_i'(v)Gi′​(v), i∈I(v)i\in I(v)i∈I(v), are linearly independent in V∗V^*V∗.

In the Lean development these are EkelandVP.Constraints.feasibleSet p G and EkelandVP.Constraints.IsRegular p G, with constraints indexed by Fin m.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 330)

Assume (3.4), C≠∅\mathcal C\ne\emptysetC=∅, and that FFF is bounded below on C\mathcal CC (3.5). Then for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there are vε∈Cv_\varepsilon\in\mathcal Cvε​∈C and λ1,…,λm∈R\lambda_1,\dots,\lambda_m\in\mathbb Rλ1​,…,λm​∈R with

F(vε)≤inf⁡CF+ε2,λi≥0 (i>p),λi=0 if Gi(vε)≠0,F(v_\varepsilon)\le\inf_{\mathcal C}F+\varepsilon^2,\qquad \lambda_i\ge0\ (i>p),\qquad \lambda_i=0 \text{ if } G_i(v_\varepsilon)\ne0,F(vε​)≤Cinf​F+ε2,λi​≥0 (i>p),λi​=0 if Gi​(vε​)=0, ∥F′(vε)−∑i=1mλiGi′(vε)∥∗≤ε.\Big\|F'(v_\varepsilon)-\sum_{i=1}^m\lambda_iG_i'(v_\varepsilon)\Big\|_*\le\varepsilon.​F′(vε​)−i=1∑m​λi​Gi′​(vε​)​∗​≤ε.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (3.8)–(3.12): a feasible vvv with F(v)≤inf⁡CF+ε2F(v)\le\inf_{\mathcal C}F+\varepsilon^2F(v)≤infC​F+ε2 and F(w)≥F(v)−ε∥w−v∥F(w)\ge F(v)-\varepsilon\|w-v\|F(w)≥F(v)−ε∥w−v∥ for all w∈Cw\in\mathcal Cw∈C (the variational principle applied to FFF restricted to C\mathcal CC; no regularity needed).
  2. (3.16): at a regular feasible point vvv, every hhh with ⟨Gi′(v),h⟩=0\langle G_i'(v),h\rangle=0⟨Gi′​(v),h⟩=0 (i≤pi\le pi≤p) and ⟨Gi′(v),h⟩≥0\langle G_i'(v),h\rangle\ge0⟨Gi′​(v),h⟩≥0 (i>pi>pi>p, i∈I(v)i\in I(v)i∈I(v)) is the initial velocity of a C1C^1C1 curve u:[0,τ]→Cu:[0,\tau]\to\mathcal Cu:[0,τ]→C with u(0)=vu(0)=vu(0)=v.
  3. Lemma 3.2: at a point with the property of milestone 1, ⟨F′(v),h⟩≥−ε∥h∥\langle F'(v),h\rangle\ge-\varepsilon\|h\|⟨F′(v),h⟩≥−ε∥h∥ for every such hhh.
  4. Lemma 3.3: an ε\varepsilonε-Farkas–Minkowski lemma in V∗V^*V∗: if ⟨w∗,h⟩≥−ε∥h∥\langle w^*,h\rangle\ge-\varepsilon\|h\|⟨w∗,h⟩≥−ε∥h∥ whenever ⟨ui∗,h⟩=0\langle u_i^*,h\rangle=0⟨ui∗​,h⟩=0 and ⟨vj∗,h⟩≥0\langle v_j^*,h\rangle\ge0⟨vj∗​,h⟩≥0, then ∥w∗−∑λiui∗−∑μjvj∗∥∗≤ε\|w^*-\sum\lambda_iu_i^*-\sum\mu_jv_j^*\|_*\le\varepsilon∥w∗−∑λi​ui∗​−∑μj​vj∗​∥∗​≤ε for some λi∈R\lambda_i\in\mathbb Rλi​∈R and μj≥0\mu_j\ge0μj​≥0.

An additional item states Corollary 3.4 (p. 333), the one-constraint case: if G(v)=0⇒G′(v)≠0G(v)=0\Rightarrow G'(v)\ne0G(v)=0⇒G′(v)=0, {G=0}≠∅\{G=0\}\neq\emptyset{G=0}=∅ and FFF is bounded below on {G=0}\{G=0\}{G=0}, then for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there are vεv_\varepsilonvε​ with G(vε)=0G(v_\varepsilon)=0G(vε​)=0 and λε∈R\lambda_\varepsilon\in\mathbb Rλε​∈R with ∥F′(vε)−λεG′(vε)∥∗≤ε\|F'(v_\varepsilon)-\lambda_\varepsilon G'(v_\varepsilon)\|_*\le\varepsilon∥F′(vε​)−λε​G′(vε​)∥∗​≤ε.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.1 is an existence theorem for approximate KKT points that needs neither compactness nor attainment of the infimum. It shows that every bounded-below problem with regular constraints has a sequence of feasible points whose objective values converge to the infimum and along which the KKT residual tends to zero. This is the property that later work calls approximate KKT or asymptotic KKT (AKKT) and uses as a stopping criterion and as a sequential optimality condition for nonlinear programming. Corollary 3.4 is the corresponding nonlinear eigenvalue statement: on a regular level set, F′F'F′ is approximately proportional to G′G'G′ at almost-minimizing points.

Formalizing it. The result is classical and proved in the paper; to our knowledge no machine-checked version exists. Mathlib has the Fréchet derivative, the implicit function theorem for strictly differentiable maps, Banach–Alaoglu and the Hahn–Banach separation theorems, but no Ekeland principle in this form, no Lyusternik-type tangent-curve theorem for mixed equality–inequality constraints, and no Farkas lemma in a dual Banach space. Each milestone is a reusable piece of nonlinear optimization theory in Banach spaces.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, "take a minimizer and apply the Lagrange multiplier rule", fails at the first step because no minimizer need exist. The variational principle supplies a point vεv_\varepsilonvε​ that minimizes F+ε∥⋅−vε∥F+\varepsilon\|\cdot-v_\varepsilon\|F+ε∥⋅−vε​∥ on C\mathcal CC, but that function is not differentiable at vεv_\varepsilonvε​, so the multiplier rule cannot be applied to it directly either. Two further gaps remain. Linearized feasible directions (those satisfying the derivative conditions on the active constraints) need not be directions along which one can actually move inside C\mathcal CC; closing this gap requires the regularity assumption and completeness of VVV, and must keep the active inequality constraints nonnegative, not just the equalities. And the resulting first-order inequality, which holds only up to ε∥h∥\varepsilon\|h\|ε∥h∥, must be turned into an approximate multiplier representation in V∗V^*V∗, an infinite-dimensional dual space in which the usual finite-dimensional Farkas lemma does not apply as stated.

Formalization scope

  • VVV is a real Banach space: [NormedAddCommGroup V] [NormedSpace ℝ V] [CompleteSpace V]. V∗V^*V∗ is V →L[ℝ] ℝ with the operator norm; F′(v)F'(v)F′(v) is fderiv ℝ F v.
  • Constraints are one family G : Fin m → V → ℝ, 0-based: the paper's constraint iii is Lean index i−1i-1i−1, an equality constraint iff its index is <p<p<p. p ≤ m is assumed in the goal.
  • C1C^1C1 is ContDiff ℝ 1; FFF is Differentiable ℝ F (Fréchet-differentiable everywhere).
  • No infimum over C\mathcal CC is formed: "bounded below" is BddBelow (F '' 𝒞) and "F(v)≤inf⁡CF+ε2F(v)\le\inf_{\mathcal C}F+\varepsilon^2F(v)≤infC​F+ε2" is "F(v)≤F(w)+ε2F(v)\le F(w)+\varepsilon^2F(v)≤F(w)+ε2 for all w∈Cw\in\mathcal Cw∈C". A real infimum over an empty or unbounded set would be a junk value.
  • Added hypotheses, disclosed in each item: C≠∅\mathcal C\ne\emptysetC=∅ (goal and milestone 1) and {G=0}≠∅\{G=0\}\ne\emptyset{G=0}=∅ (Corollary 3.4). Without them the paper's hypotheses hold vacuously (inf⁡∅=+∞\inf\emptyset=+\inftyinf∅=+∞) while the conclusion asks for a feasible point.
  • Lemma 3.3 is stated with ≤ε\le\varepsilon≤ε. The paper prints <ε<\varepsilon<ε in (3.20), which fails for V=RV=\mathbb RV=R, no constraints and w∗=ε idw^*=\varepsilon\,\mathrm{id}w∗=εid; its proof gives ≤\le≤, and Theorem 3.1 uses ≤\le≤.
  • Lemma 3.2 and milestone 2 assume the linear independence (3.4) only at the point vvv under consideration, and Lemma 3.2 is stated for any feasible vvv with property (3.12); this is exactly what the paper's proof uses.
  • Regularity is a linear independence of the indexed family (Gi′(v))i∈I(v)(G_i'(v))_{i\in I(v)}(Gi′​(v))i∈I(v)​, so a repeated saturated constraint violates it; the constraint qualification cannot be trivialized by collapsing duplicates.

Contributions welcome: a general Ekeland principle with the strict-minimizer conclusion, a Lyusternik–Graves tangent-curve theorem for C1C^1C1 maps with surjective derivative onto Rk\mathbb R^kRk, and a closedness result for finitely generated cones in V∗V^*V∗.

Selected references

  • I. Ekeland, On the Variational Principle, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 47 (1974) 324–353. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(74)90025-0
  • I. Ekeland, Nonconvex minimization problems, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. (N.S.) 1 (1979) 443–474. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0273-0979-1979-14595-6
  • R. Andreani, G. Haeser, J. M. Martínez, On sequential optimality conditions for smooth constrained optimization, Optimization 60 (2011) 627–641. https://doi.org/10.1080/02331930903578700
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Captain: savarin

Does the sharp diagonal Hlawka constant work for all complex matrices when p ≥ 256?Open Problem

The Hlawka inequality for Schatten ppp-norms is a cousin of the triangle inequality: it relates the norms of three matrices to the norms of their pairwise sums and their total sum. The question is how large a comparison constant is needed to make this inequality hold.

Does the sharp diagonal constant work for general matrices?

For every real p≥256p\ge256p≥256, the optimal Hlawka constant for complex diagonal matrices is already proved in Lean. This mission asks whether that same constant works for all complex matrices, including rectangular ones. The statement is a conjecture. Accepted diagonal result

Audenaert and Kittaneh's Problem 7 asks for the best constant in the Schatten-norm setting, if one exists. Existence of some finite dimension-independent constant for every real p>1p>1p>1 is already settled by the project's Lean theorem. The task here is to establish the specified sharp candidate in the range p≥256p\ge256p≥256. Audenaert–Kittaneh, §8.2, proved existence result

Definitions and the goal

For a complex matrix AAA with singular values si(A)s_i(A)si​(A), its Schatten norm is

Np(A)=(∑isi(A)p)1/p.N_p(A)=\left(\sum_i s_i(A)^p\right)^{1/p}.Np​(A)=(i∑​si​(A)p)1/p.

There is no normalization by dimension. For three matrices of the same shape, define

Δ3=Np(A)+Np(B)+Np(C)−Np(A+B+C),\Delta_3=N_p(A)+N_p(B)+N_p(C)-N_p(A+B+C),Δ3​=Np​(A)+Np​(B)+Np​(C)−Np​(A+B+C), Δ2=2(Np(A)+Np(B)+Np(C))−Np(A+B)−Np(A+C)−Np(B+C).\Delta_2=2\bigl(N_p(A)+N_p(B)+N_p(C)\bigr) -N_p(A+B)-N_p(A+C)-N_p(B+C).Δ2​=2(Np​(A)+Np​(B)+Np​(C))−Np​(A+B)−Np​(A+C)−Np​(B+C).

Formal Schatten-norm definition

The shared cyclic candidate is

Kp=sup⁡t∈[1/2,2]3(tp+2)1/p−31/p∣2−t∣6(tp+2)1/p−3(2∣1−t∣p+2p)1/p.K_p=\sup_{t\in[1/2,2]} \frac{3(t^p+2)^{1/p}-3^{1/p}|2-t|} {6(t^p+2)^{1/p}-3(2|1-t|^p+2^p)^{1/p}}.Kp​=t∈[1/2,2]sup​6(tp+2)1/p−3(2∣1−t∣p+2p)1/p3(tp+2)1/p−31/p∣2−t∣​.

The fraction is the deficit ratio for the coordinate triple (−t,1,1),(1,−t,1),(1,1,−t)(-t,1,1),(1,-t,1),(1,1,-t)(−t,1,1),(1,−t,1),(1,1,−t). For p>1p>1p>1, its denominator is positive on the displayed interval and the supremum is attained. Cyclic definitions and attainment

The goal asks whether Δ3≤KpΔ2\Delta_3\le K_p\Delta_2Δ3​≤Kp​Δ2​ for every real p≥256p\ge256p≥256 and every triple of complex matrices of every finite shape. One constant for each exponent must work across all dimensions and triples. The endpoint 256, noninteger exponents, zero dimensions, singular and zero matrices, unequal norms and zero pair deficit are included.

Lean states the goal for complex-linear maps between any two finite-dimensional complex inner-product spaces, allowing different dimensions. No positivity, self-adjointness, commutativity or common diagonalization assumption is imposed.

Why the diagonal proof does not settle this

The singular values determine a matrix's own norm. However, the separate singular-value lists of three matrices do not determine the norms of their pair sums and total sum. The diagonal theorem therefore does not supply the seven matrix norms needed in this inequality. Their relative directions matter as well.

The existing existence theorem supplies a constant, but does not identify it with KpK_pKp​. A proof here needs the exact cyclic constant. A proof only for even integer exponents or a restricted class of matrices would not settle this goal.

What a resolution would establish

If the conjectured bound holds, it is automatically optimal uniformly over all finite matrix shapes: diagonal three-dimensional examples already require at least KpK_pKp​. Thus the missing step is that this constant works for arbitrary matrices. A counterexample would show that the diagonal constant is insufficient somewhere in the stated range. Cyclic lower bound, diagonal Schatten identity

Either outcome addresses this range of exponents; it would not settle the optimal general-matrix constant for every 1<p<2561<p<2561<p<256.

The foundation mission establishes the optimal diagonal constant for every real p≥256p\ge256p≥256. The cutoff-90 mission has since extended the diagonal result in Lean to every real p≥90p\ge90p≥90. The diagonal campaign invites contributors to lower that cutoff below 90.

This mission keeps p≥256p\ge256p≥256 and asks whether the same optimal constant works for arbitrary complex matrices, including rectangular ones. It can be pursued independently of improvements to the diagonal cutoff.

Its three linked milestones are already-proved background: existence, the sharp diagonal result, and the diagonal norm identity. The main general-matrix goal remains open. No complete proof is supplied for it.

References

  • K. M. R. Audenaert and F. Kittaneh, Problems and Conjectures in Matrix and Operator Inequalities, 2012, §8.2, Problem 7. arXiv:1201.5232
  • Ezzeri Esa and contributors, Hlawka–Schatten inequalities, Lean source repository, revision 79aa498bfcf7b22bd91d771fb32ec278e2d4704b. Existence and diagonal libraries

Established results on Prove2Me

  • The accepted sharp diagonal bound for every real p ≥ 256.
  • The accepted diagonal Schatten norm identity.
  • The public existence theorem for every real p > 1.
98 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Captain: savarin

Sharp diagonal Hlawka constants: foundation and proved cutoff 256Research Paper

The Hlawka inequality for Schatten ppp-norms is a cousin of the triangle inequality: it relates the norms of three matrices to the norms of their pairwise sums and their total sum. The question is how large a comparison constant is needed to make this inequality hold.

This mission establishes the best possible constant for complex diagonal matrices for every real p≥256p\ge256p≥256. The result is proved in Lean. For each exponent, one constant works for every triple of diagonal matrices of the same size, across all finite sizes.

The constant comes from a simple family of three 3×33\times33×3 diagonal matrices, called the cyclic family. Varying one parameter determines the largest comparison constant these examples require. The theorem proves that this value also works for every other triple of diagonal matrices, however large. The goal theorem gives the exact formula and statement.

This is the foundation of the sharp diagonal Hlawka campaign. It supplies the shared definitions and supporting results for lowering the exponent cutoff while keeping the same formula. A later mission has now established the result in Lean for every real p≥90p\ge90p≥90; the campaign invites further improvements.

The broader question of optimal constants for Schatten norms appears in Audenaert and Kittaneh’s Problem 7. Extending the sharp diagonal constant to general matrices is a separate challenge.

References

  • K. M. R. Audenaert and F. Kittaneh, Problems and Conjectures in Matrix and Operator Inequalities, arXiv preprint, 2012, §8.2, Problem 7. arXiv:1201.5232
  • Ezzeri Esa, Hlawka–Schatten inequalities: sharp diagonal construction, Lean source repository, 2026, revision 79aa498bfcf7b22bd91d771fb32ec278e2d4704b. Source library

Established results on Prove2Me

  • The accepted sharp diagonal bound for every real p ≥ 256.
  • The accepted diagonal Schatten norm identity.
59 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisMathematical PhysicsPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics XIV: Wave Operators and Cook's CriterionTextbook

Motivation

In a scattering experiment a particle arrives from far away, interacts with a target, and leaves again. Far from the target the forces are negligible, so long before and long after the collision the particle should move like a free particle. Scattering theory makes this precise by comparing two quantum dynamics: the free evolution e−itH0\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}e−itH0​ generated by the kinetic energy H0=−ΔH_0 = -\DeltaH0​=−Δ, and the full evolution e−itH\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH}e−itH generated by H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V. The objects that compare them are the wave operators (Møller operators) Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​, introduced by Møller (1945) and put on a rigorous footing by Jauch (1958) and Kato. Cook (1957) gave the first practical criterion for their existence. Kuroda, Birman, Agmon, Enß and others later developed the theory up to asymptotic completeness for short-range potentials.

This mission formalizes the abstract part of Chapter 12 of Teschl's Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS GSM 99, 2009): the definition and basic structure of the wave operators, Cook's criterion, and the existence of the wave operators for a square-integrable potential in three dimensions.

Setting

Let H\mathfrak HH be a complex Hilbert space. An operator AAA is a linear map on a subspace D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A), its domain; AAA is self-adjoint if D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) is dense and A=A∗A = A^*A=A∗. A projection-valued measure PPP assigns to each Borel set Ω⊆R\Omega \subseteq \mathbb RΩ⊆R an orthogonal projection P(Ω)P(\Omega)P(Ω), with P(R)=IP(\mathbb R) = \mathbb IP(R)=I and P(⋃nΩn)ψ=∑nP(Ωn)ψP(\bigcup_n\Omega_n)\psi = \sum_n P(\Omega_n)\psiP(⋃n​Ωn​)ψ=∑n​P(Ωn​)ψ for disjoint Ωn\Omega_nΩn​. The spectral measure of ψ\psiψ is μψ(Ω)=⟨ψ,P(Ω)ψ⟩\mu_\psi(\Omega) = \langle\psi, P(\Omega)\psi\rangleμψ​(Ω)=⟨ψ,P(Ω)ψ⟩. By the spectral theorem every self-adjoint AAA equals ∫λ dP(λ)\int\lambda\,dP(\lambda)∫λdP(λ) for a unique PPP: D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2 dμψ<∞}\mathfrak D(A) = \{\psi \mid \int\lambda^2\,d\mu_\psi < \infty\}D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2dμψ​<∞} and ⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λ dμψ\langle\psi, A\psi\rangle = \int\lambda\,d\mu_\psi⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λdμψ​. The time evolution e−itA\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}e−itA is the bounded operator with ⟨ψ,e−itAψ⟩=∫e−itλ dμψ(λ)\langle\psi, \mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\rangle = \int\mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda}\,d\mu_\psi(\lambda)⟨ψ,e−itAψ⟩=∫e−itλdμψ​(λ).

For two self-adjoint operators H0H_0H0​, HHH the wave operators are

D(Ω±)={ψ∈H∣∃lim⁡t→±∞eitHe−itH0ψ},Ω±ψ=lim⁡t→±∞eitHe−itH0ψ.\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm) = \{\psi \in \mathfrak H \mid \exists\lim_{t\to\pm\infty}\mathrm e^{\mathrm itH}\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}\psi\}, \qquad \Omega_\pm\psi = \lim_{t\to\pm\infty}\mathrm e^{\mathrm itH}\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}\psi .D(Ω±​)={ψ∈H∣∃t→±∞lim​eitHe−itH0​ψ},Ω±​ψ=t→±∞lim​eitHe−itH0​ψ.

D(Ω±)\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)D(Ω±​) is the set of asymptotic states and Ran⁡(Ω±)=Ω±D(Ω±)\operatorname{Ran}(\Omega_\pm) = \Omega_\pm\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)Ran(Ω±​)=Ω±​D(Ω±​) the set of states that have one. A closed subspace H1\mathfrak H_1H1​ with projection P1P_1P1​ reduces AAA if P1D(A)⊆D(A)P_1\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(A)P1​D(A)⊆D(A) and P1Aψ=AP1ψP_1A\psi = AP_1\psiP1​Aψ=AP1​ψ for ψ∈D(A)\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)ψ∈D(A).

On L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) the free Schrödinger operator is H0=−ΔH_0 = -\DeltaH0​=−Δ with domain the Sobolev space H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn): under the Fourier transform it is multiplication by p2p^2p2 on {φ∣p2φ∈L2}\{\varphi \mid p^2\varphi \in L^2\}{φ∣p2φ∈L2}. For a real potential VVV, H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V has D(H)=H2(Rn)\mathfrak D(H) = H^2(\mathbb R^n)D(H)=H2(Rn) and (Hψ)(x)=(H0ψ)(x)+V(x)ψ(x)(H\psi)(x) = (H_0\psi)(x) + V(x)\psi(x)(Hψ)(x)=(H0​ψ)(x)+V(x)ψ(x).

Formalization targets

Goal: existence of the wave operators for V∈L2(R3)V \in L^2(\mathbb R^3)V∈L2(R3) (Theorem 12.4)

Let H0H_0H0​ be the free Schrödinger operator on L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3) and H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V with a real V∈L2(R3)V \in L^2(\mathbb R^3)V∈L2(R3). Then

D(Ω+)=D(Ω−)=L2(R3),\mathfrak D(\Omega_+) = \mathfrak D(\Omega_-) = L^2(\mathbb R^3),D(Ω+​)=D(Ω−​)=L2(R3),

that is, lim⁡t→±∞eitHe−itH0ψ\lim_{t\to\pm\infty}\mathrm e^{\mathrm itH}\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}\psilimt→±∞​eitHe−itH0​ψ exists for every ψ\psiψ and both signs. Since the spectrum of H0H_0H0​ is purely absolutely continuous, this is exactly what Teschl calls "the wave operators exist" (12.14).

Milestones

  • Lemma 12.1. D(Ω±)\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)D(Ω±​) and Ran⁡(Ω±)\operatorname{Ran}(\Omega_\pm)Ran(Ω±​) are closed and Ω±:D(Ω±)→Ran⁡(Ω±)\Omega_\pm : \mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm) \to \operatorname{Ran}(\Omega_\pm)Ω±​:D(Ω±​)→Ran(Ω±​) is unitary.
  • Theorem 12.2. D(Ω±)\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)D(Ω±​) reduces H0H_0H0​, Ran⁡(Ω±)\operatorname{Ran}(\Omega_\pm)Ran(Ω±​) reduces HHH, and the restricted operators are unitarily equivalent: Ω±H0ψ=HΩ±ψ\Omega_\pm H_0\psi = H\Omega_\pm\psiΩ±​H0​ψ=HΩ±​ψ for ψ∈D(Ω±)∩D(H0)\psi \in \mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm) \cap \mathfrak D(H_0)ψ∈D(Ω±​)∩D(H0​).
  • Lemma 12.3 (Cook). If D(H)⊆D(H0)\mathfrak D(H) \subseteq \mathfrak D(H_0)D(H)⊆D(H0​), ψ∈D(H0)\psi \in \mathfrak D(H_0)ψ∈D(H0​) and ∫0∞∥(H−H0)exp⁡(∓itH0)ψ∥ dt<∞\int_0^\infty\|(H - H_0)\exp(\mp\mathrm itH_0)\psi\|\,dt < \infty∫0∞​∥(H−H0​)exp(∓itH0​)ψ∥dt<∞, then ψ∈D(Ω±)\psi \in \mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)ψ∈D(Ω±​) and ∥(Ω±−I)ψ∥≤∫0∞∥(H−H0)exp⁡(∓itH0)ψ∥ dt\|(\Omega_\pm - \mathbb I)\psi\| \le \int_0^\infty\|(H - H_0)\exp(\mp\mathrm itH_0)\psi\|\,dt∥(Ω±​−I)ψ∥≤∫0∞​∥(H−H0​)exp(∓itH0​)ψ∥dt.

Significance

Existence of the wave operators is the first step of every scattering theory for Schrödinger operators: without it the scattering operator S=Ω+−1Ω−S = \Omega_+^{-1}\Omega_-S=Ω+−1​Ω−​ is not defined on a useful set of states, and the questions of completeness and asymptotic completeness (Enß's theorem, Theorem 12.12 of the same chapter) cannot be posed. Lemma 12.1 and Theorem 12.2 are the structural facts that make Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​ partial isometries intertwining the two Hamiltonians; they imply that HHH restricted to Ran⁡(Ω±)\operatorname{Ran}(\Omega_\pm)Ran(Ω±​) has absolutely continuous spectrum whenever H0H_0H0​ does, and that kinetic energy is conserved in scattering. Cook's criterion is the tool used in practice to prove existence for concrete potentials, including Coulomb-type and time-dependent problems.

The results are classical and proved in the literature. They are not formalized. Mathlib has neither the spectral theorem nor a functional calculus for unbounded self-adjoint operators, and no scattering theory. The platform has no statement about wave operators; its BookProof development contains Stone's theorem for its own structure of unbounded operators, which this mission does not use.

Difficulty

The limit defining Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​ involves two unitary groups whose generators do not commute, and neither group is explicit for the perturbed operator HHH. For Cook's criterion the product eitHe−itH0ψ\mathrm e^{\mathrm itH}\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}\psieitHe−itH0​ψ has to be differentiated in ttt, which needs control of domains: e−itH0ψ\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0}\psie−itH0​ψ must stay in the domain of H−H0H - H_0H−H0​, and the derivative of a strongly continuous unitary group exists only on the domain of its generator. For the goal, the time evolution of a general ψ∈L2(R3)\psi \in L^2(\mathbb R^3)ψ∈L2(R3) has no decay rate at all, and the potential V∈L2V \in L^2V∈L2 is unbounded and has no decay assumption beyond square integrability, so the integrability condition of Cook's criterion cannot be checked for every ψ\psiψ directly. The intertwining relation (12.8) concerns unbounded operators and needs the reduction of the domains, not only an identity between bounded operators.

Formalization scope

The formalization uses Lean 4 with Mathlib. Operators are LinearPMaps H →ₗ.[ℂ] H on a complex Hilbert space; self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint. Separability is not assumed.

The spectral theorem is not part of this mission. Every statement takes projection-valued measures P0P_0P0​ and PPP as data, with the hypotheses H0=∫λ dP0(λ)H_0 = \int\lambda\,dP_0(\lambda)H0​=∫λdP0​(λ) and H=∫λ dP(λ)H = \int\lambda\,dP(\lambda)H=∫λdP(λ) (domain and quadratic form as above), which is the form the spectral theorem guarantees and which determines P0P_0P0​ and PPP. The time evolutions are e−itH0=∫e−itλ dP0\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH_0} = \int\mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda}\,dP_0e−itH0​=∫e−itλdP0​ and e−itH=∫e−itλ dP\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itH} = \int\mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda}\,dPe−itH=∫e−itλdP. In the goal, the self-adjointness of H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V (Theorem 10.2 of the book) enters only through the existence of PPP. Nothing is assumed about Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​.

The sign of Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​ is a unit s : ℤˣ, and t→±∞t \to \pm\inftyt→±∞ is written as t→+∞t \to +\inftyt→+∞ in the variable ststst. Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​ is Mathlib's limUnder and is used only on D(Ω±)\mathfrak D(\Omega_\pm)D(Ω±​). A formalization that set Ω±ψ=0\Omega_\pm\psi = 0Ω±​ψ=0 where the limit fails and then proved only that Ω±\Omega_\pmΩ±​ is isometric would lose the content of the goal; here the goal asserts that the limit exists for every ψ∈L2(R3)\psi \in L^2(\mathbb R^3)ψ∈L2(R3). In Cook's lemma the finiteness of the integral is integrability on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), the bound uses the Bochner integral, and the hypothesis that exp⁡(∓itH0)ψ\exp(\mp\mathrm itH_0)\psiexp(∓itH0​)ψ lies in D(H)\mathfrak D(H)D(H) for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, which the integrand presupposes, is explicit.

L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3) is Mathlib's Lp ℂ 2 on EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin 3). The free Schrödinger operator is characterized through Mathlib's unitary L2L^2L2 Fourier transform FMf(ξ)=∫e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩f(x) dx\mathcal F_M f(\xi) = \int\mathrm e^{-2\pi\mathrm i\langle x,\xi\rangle}f(x)\,dxFM​f(ξ)=∫e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩f(x)dx, not the book's (2π)−n/2∫e−ipxf(x) dx(2\pi)^{-n/2}\int\mathrm e^{-\mathrm ipx}f(x)\,dx(2π)−n/2∫e−ipxf(x)dx. The constants are translated: D(H0)={ψ∣∣ξ∣2FMψ∈L2}\mathfrak D(H_0) = \{\psi \mid |\xi|^2\mathcal F_M\psi \in L^2\}D(H0​)={ψ∣∣ξ∣2FM​ψ∈L2} and FM(H0ψ)=4π2∣ξ∣2FMψ\mathcal F_M(H_0\psi) = 4\pi^2|\xi|^2\mathcal F_M\psiFM​(H0​ψ)=4π2∣ξ∣2FM​ψ. H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V has D(H)=D(H0)\mathfrak D(H) = \mathfrak D(H_0)D(H)=D(H0​) and Hψ=H0ψ+VψH\psi = H_0\psi + V\psiHψ=H0​ψ+Vψ almost everywhere.

A complete development needs a functional calculus for projection-valued measures (strong continuity and differentiability of e−itA\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}e−itA on D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A), Theorem 5.1), the explicit L1→L∞L^1 \to L^\inftyL1→L∞ decay of the free Schrödinger group in R3\mathbb R^3R3 ((7.31) of the book), and density of L1∩H2L^1 \cap H^2L1∩H2 in L2L^2L2. These pieces are reusable for the rest of Chapter 12 (incoming and outgoing states, short-range potentials, asymptotic completeness). Proofs of any milestone and of such supporting lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, American Mathematical Society, 2009. doi:10.1090/gsm/099. Chapter 12, pp. 247–257.
  • J. M. Cook, Convergence to the Møller wave-matrix, J. Math. and Phys. 36 (1957), 82–87. doi:10.1002/sapm195736182.
  • J. M. Jauch, Theory of the scattering operator, Helv. Phys. Acta 31 (1958), 127–158.
  • M. Reed, B. Simon, Methods of Modern Mathematical Physics III: Scattering Theory, Academic Press, 1979.
  • V. Enß, Asymptotic completeness for quantum mechanical potential scattering. I. Short range potentials, Comm. Math. Phys. 61 (1978), 285–291. doi:10.1007/BF01940771.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisMathematical Physics·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics VII: Compact, Hilbert–Schmidt and Trace Class OperatorsTextbook

Motivation

Quantum mechanics describes mixed states by density operators: positive operators ρ\rhoρ on a Hilbert space with tr⁡(ρ)=1\operatorname{tr}(\rho) = 1tr(ρ)=1. Expectation values are traces tr⁡(ρA)\operatorname{tr}(\rho A)tr(ρA), perturbation determinants and spectral shift functions are built from traces of resolvent differences, and scattering theory (the Kato–Rosenblum and Birman–Krein theorems) is phrased in terms of trace class perturbations. All of this needs a trace in infinite dimensions, and the trace ∑n⟨φn,Kφn⟩\sum_n \langle \varphi_n, K\varphi_n\rangle∑n​⟨φn​,Kφn​⟩ only makes sense on a restricted class of operators.

This mission formalizes Sections 6.2–6.3 of G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, 2009), the standard route from compact operators through Hilbert–Schmidt operators to the trace class. The theory goes back to von Neumann and Schatten in the 1940s (R. Schatten, Norm Ideals of Completely Continuous Operators, Springer 1960). A modern account is B. Simon, Trace Ideals and Their Applications (AMS 2005).

Setting

Let H\mathfrak{H}H be a complex Hilbert space, with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ conjugate-linear in the first argument, and let L(H)\mathfrak{L}(\mathfrak{H})L(H) be the bounded linear operators on H\mathfrak{H}H with the operator norm ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥. An operator is of finite rank if its range is finite dimensional, and the compact operators C(H)\mathfrak{C}(\mathfrak{H})C(H) are the norm closure of the finite rank operators.

For K∈L(H)K \in \mathfrak{L}(\mathfrak{H})K∈L(H) with adjoint K∗K^*K∗, the operator K∗KK^*KK∗K is positive. The singular values sj(K)>0s_j(K) > 0sj​(K)>0 of a compact KKK are the square roots of the nonzero eigenvalues of K∗KK^*KK∗K, each repeated according to its multiplicity dim⁡Ker⁡(K∗K−μ)\dim\operatorname{Ker}(K^*K - \mu)dimKer(K∗K−μ). For p≥1p \ge 1p≥1 the Schatten ppp-norm and Schatten ppp-class are

∥K∥p=(∑jsj(K)p)1/p∈[0,∞],Jp(H)={K∈C(H)∣∥K∥p<∞}.\|K\|_p = \Big(\sum_j s_j(K)^p\Big)^{1/p} \in [0,\infty], \qquad \mathcal{J}_p(\mathfrak{H}) = \{K \in \mathfrak{C}(\mathfrak{H}) \mid \|K\|_p < \infty\}.∥K∥p​=(j∑​sj​(K)p)1/p∈[0,∞],Jp​(H)={K∈C(H)∣∥K∥p​<∞}.

A compact KKK is Hilbert–Schmidt if K∈J2(H)K \in \mathcal{J}_2(\mathfrak{H})K∈J2​(H) and trace class if K∈J1(H)K \in \mathcal{J}_1(\mathfrak{H})K∈J1​(H). For an orthonormal basis {φn}\{\varphi_n\}{φn​} of H\mathfrak{H}H the trace is

tr⁡(K)=∑n⟨φn,Kφn⟩.\operatorname{tr}(K) = \sum_n \langle \varphi_n, K\varphi_n\rangle .tr(K)=n∑​⟨φn​,Kφn​⟩.

In Lean these are compactOperators H, schattenNorm p K, schattenClass H p, IsHilbertSchmidt K, IsTraceClass K and trace K, in the namespace TeschlQM.TraceClass.

Formalization targets

Goal: the trace is well defined (Lemma 6.15)

For every trace class KKK and every orthonormal basis {φn}\{\varphi_n\}{φn​} the series (6.26) converges, and for any two orthonormal bases {φn}\{\varphi_n\}{φn​}, {ψm}\{\psi_m\}{ψm​}

∑n⟨φn,Kφn⟩=∑m⟨ψm,Kψm⟩=tr⁡(K).\sum_n \langle \varphi_n, K\varphi_n\rangle = \sum_m \langle \psi_m, K\psi_m\rangle = \operatorname{tr}(K).n∑​⟨φn​,Kφn​⟩=m∑​⟨ψm​,Kψm​⟩=tr(K).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 6.7 (canonical form): a compact KKK has the form K=∑jsj⟨ϕj,⋅⟩ϕ^jK = \sum_j s_j\langle\phi_j, \cdot\rangle\hat\phi_jK=∑j​sj​⟨ϕj​,⋅⟩ϕ^​j​ with orthonormal {ϕj}\{\phi_j\}{ϕj​}, {ϕ^j}\{\hat\phi_j\}{ϕ^​j​}, and the sj2s_j^2sj2​ are the nonzero eigenvalues of K∗KK^*KK∗K and of KK∗KK^*KK∗, counted with multiplicity.
  2. Lemma 6.10: a compact KKK is Hilbert–Schmidt iff ∑n∥Kψn∥2<∞\sum_n\|K\psi_n\|^2 < \infty∑n​∥Kψn​∥2<∞ for some orthonormal basis, and then ∑n∥Kψn∥2=∥K∥22\sum_n\|K\psi_n\|^2 = \|K\|_2^2∑n​∥Kψn​∥2=∥K∥22​ for every orthonormal basis.
  3. Corollary 6.11: the Hilbert–Schmidt operators form a ∗*∗-ideal, with ∥KA∥2,∥AK∥2≤∥A∥∥K∥2\|KA\|_2, \|AK\|_2 \le \|A\|\|K\|_2∥KA∥2​,∥AK∥2​≤∥A∥∥K∥2​.
  4. Lemma 6.12: (Jp(H),∥⋅∥p)(\mathcal{J}_p(\mathfrak{H}), \|\cdot\|_p)(Jp​(H),∥⋅∥p​) is a Banach space, and
∥K∥p=sup⁡{(∑j∣⟨ψj,Kφj⟩∣p)1/p  ∣  {ψj},{φj} orthonormal}.\|K\|_p = \sup\Big\{\Big(\sum_j|\langle\psi_j, K\varphi_j\rangle|^p\Big)^{1/p} \;\Big|\; \{\psi_j\}, \{\varphi_j\} \text{ orthonormal}\Big\}.∥K∥p​=sup{(j∑​∣⟨ψj​,Kφj​⟩∣p)1/p​{ψj​},{φj​} orthonormal}.
  1. Lemma 6.13: KKK is trace class iff K=K1K2K = K_1K_2K=K1​K2​ with K1,K2K_1, K_2K1​,K2​ Hilbert–Schmidt, and then ∥K∥1≤∥K1∥2∥K2∥2\|K\|_1 \le \|K_1\|_2\|K_2\|_2∥K∥1​≤∥K1​∥2​∥K2​∥2​.
  2. Corollary 6.14: the trace class is a ∗*∗-ideal, with ∥KA∥1,∥AK∥1≤∥A∥∥K∥1\|KA\|_1, \|AK\|_1 \le \|A\|\|K\|_1∥KA∥1​,∥AK∥1​≤∥A∥∥K∥1​.
  3. Lemma 6.16 (after the goal): the trace is linear, tr⁡(K∗)=tr⁡(K)‾\operatorname{tr}(K^*) = \overline{\operatorname{tr}(K)}tr(K∗)=tr(K)​, it is monotone for the operator order, and tr⁡(AK)=tr⁡(KA)\operatorname{tr}(AK) = \operatorname{tr}(KA)tr(AK)=tr(KA) for bounded AAA.

Significance

The result itself. Lemma 6.15 is what turns the trace into a linear functional on J1(H)\mathcal{J}_1(\mathfrak{H})J1​(H) at all. Every later use of the trace rests on it: the normalization of density matrices, the duality J1(H)∗≅L(H)\mathcal{J}_1(\mathfrak{H})^* \cong \mathfrak{L}(\mathfrak{H})J1​(H)∗≅L(H), trace formulas and spectral shift functions, and Lidskii's theorem (the trace is the sum of the eigenvalues), which Teschl mentions right after the lemma. The ideal properties (Corollaries 6.11 and 6.14) and the factorization (Lemma 6.13) are the everyday tools for proving that a concrete operator, such as f(x)g(−i∇)f(x)g(-i\nabla)f(x)g(−i∇) in Chapter 7, is trace class.

Formalizing it. Mathlib has compact operators (IsCompactOperator), Hilbert bases, singular values and the trace of linear maps on finite-dimensional spaces (LinearMap.singularValues, LinearMap.trace), but no infinite-dimensional singular values, Schatten classes, Hilbert–Schmidt or trace class operators, and no basis-independent trace. The Prove2Me corpus has finite-dimensional trace norms (matrices) and L2L^2L2 kernel operators, but no statement of this section. The results are classical and fully proved in the literature; the work is to formalize them.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for basis independence is to expand KKK in both bases and interchange the two sums. In infinite dimensions that interchange is not justified for an arbitrary bounded KKK: for the identity on an infinite-dimensional space, or for a non-trace-class compact operator, the diagonal series diverges. The trace class hypothesis must therefore enter through a factorization, and the factorization rests on the canonical form of Theorem 6.7, which in turn needs the spectral theorem for the compact self-adjoint operator K∗KK^*KK∗K, including finite multiplicity of its nonzero eigenvalues. A second difficulty is bookkeeping: the singular values are a family with multiplicities that may be finite or countably infinite, and the Schatten norm, the Hilbert–Schmidt sums over a basis and the supremum formula (6.23) all have to be matched as sums in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].

Formalization scope

  • Hilbert space. {H : Type*} [NormedAddCommGroup H] [InnerProductSpace ℂ H] [CompleteSpace H]. Separability is not assumed. Orthonormal bases are Mathlib HilbertBasis ι ℂ H with arbitrary index types, so every statement covers the book's separable case.
  • Operators. Bounded operators are H →L[ℂ] H, products are compositions, adjoints are ContinuousLinearMap.adjoint, and the operator order in Lemma 6.16 is Mathlib's Loewner order (K1≤K2K_1 \le K_2K1​≤K2​ iff K2−K1K_2 - K_1K2​−K1​ is positive). Traces are compared with the partial order of C\mathbb{C}C.
  • Compactness is the book's definition, membership in the norm closure of the finite rank operators, not Mathlib's IsCompactOperator.
  • Singular values are not enumerated. ∑jsj(K)p\sum_j s_j(K)^p∑j​sj​(K)p is written as ∑μ>0dim⁡Ker⁡(K∗K−μ) μp/2\sum_{\mu > 0} \dim\operatorname{Ker}(K^*K - \mu)\,\mu^{p/2}∑μ>0​dimKer(K∗K−μ)μp/2, with the dimension in {0,1,… }∪{∞}\{0,1,\dots\}\cup\{\infty\}{0,1,…}∪{∞}. Norms and sums live in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so a divergent series is ∞\infty∞, never a junk 000. Hilbert–Schmidt and trace class are defined by ∥K∥2<∞\|K\|_2 < \infty∥K∥2​<∞ and ∥K∥1<∞\|K\|_1 < \infty∥K∥1​<∞ on compact KKK. The basis characterizations (Lemma 6.10) and the factorization (Lemma 6.13) are theorems, not definitions.
  • Trace. trace K is ∑n⟨φn,Kφn⟩\sum_n\langle\varphi_n, K\varphi_n\rangle∑n​⟨φn​,Kφn​⟩ in one fixed, chosen Hilbert basis. The goal states summability in every Hilbert basis, not merely equality of tsum values. Since the tsum of a non-summable family is 000 in Mathlib, a statement asserting only that all tsums agree would be trivially satisfiable by divergent series. That trivializing reading is ruled out.
  • Lemma 6.12 assumes 1≤p1 \le p1≤p (the book's proof uses the conjugate exponent). "Banach space" is spelled out as closure under the linear operations, the norm axioms, and completeness of ∥⋅∥p\|\cdot\|_p∥⋅∥p​-Cauchy sequences.
  • No projection-valued measure, no functional calculus and no Fourier transform is used, and nothing is taken as data.

Reusable infrastructure a complete development will produce includes the spectral theorem for compact self-adjoint operators with multiplicities, the singular value decomposition in infinite dimensions, and the Hilbert–Schmidt and trace class ideals. All of these are welcome as independent contributions, and any of them would fill gaps in Mathlib.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, AMS, 2009, Sections 6.2–6.3. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/099
  • R. Schatten, Norm Ideals of Completely Continuous Operators, Ergebnisse der Mathematik und ihrer Grenzgebiete, Springer, 1960 (no stable link verified).
  • B. Simon, Trace Ideals and Their Applications, 2nd ed., Mathematical Surveys and Monographs 120, AMS, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1090/surv/120
  • M. Reed and B. Simon, Methods of Modern Mathematical Physics I: Functional Analysis, Academic Press, 1980, Section VI.6 (no stable link verified).
12 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisMathematical PhysicsPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics XIII: Atomic Schrödinger Operators and the HVZ TheoremTextbook

Motivation

An atom with NNN electrons is described, with the nucleus fixed at the origin, by a Schrödinger operator on L2(R3N)L^2(\mathbb R^{3N})L2(R3N) whose potential does not decay in all directions: moving one electron to infinity while the others stay near the nucleus leaves the remaining Coulomb attraction untouched. For this reason the standard route to the essential spectrum of a one-particle operator, showing that the potential is a relatively compact perturbation of −Δ-\Delta−Δ, fails for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2. The HVZ theorem, due to Zhislin (1960), van Winter (1964) and Hunziker (1966), gives the answer anyway: the essential spectrum of the NNN-electron atom begins exactly at the ground state energy of the ion with one electron removed. It is the basic structural result of NNN-body quantum mechanics, and the starting point for every discussion of bound states, ionization energies and the stability of atoms and molecules.

This mission follows Chapter 11 of Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS GSM 99, 2009), which proves self-adjointness by Kato's theorem and the HVZ theorem by the localization method of Ismagilov, Morgan, Simon and Sigal.

Setting

Write Rn\mathbb R^nRn for Euclidean space with Lebesgue measure. The Sobolev space H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn) is the set of ψ∈L2(Rn)\psi \in L^2(\mathbb R^n)ψ∈L2(Rn) with ∣p∣2ψ^(p)∈L2(Rn)|p|^2 \hat\psi(p) \in L^2(\mathbb R^n)∣p∣2ψ^​(p)∈L2(Rn), and the free Schrödinger operator is H0ψ=−Δψ=(∣p∣2ψ^)∨H_0\psi = -\Delta\psi = (|p|^2\hat\psi)^\veeH0​ψ=−Δψ=(∣p∣2ψ^​)∨ with domain H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn) (units ℏ=1\hbar = 1ℏ=1, mass 1/21/21/2). A measurable function VVV acts as the multiplication operator (Vψ)(x)=V(x)ψ(x)(V\psi)(x) = V(x)\psi(x)(Vψ)(x)=V(x)ψ(x) on its maximal domain {ψ∈L2∣Vψ∈L2}\{\psi \in L^2 \mid V\psi \in L^2\}{ψ∈L2∣Vψ∈L2}.

For an operator AAA with domain D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) in a Hilbert space, the resolvent set ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A) is the set of z∈Cz \in \mathbb Cz∈C for which A−zA - zA−z maps D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) bijectively onto the space with bounded inverse RA(z)R_A(z)RA​(z), and σ(A)=C∖ρ(A)\sigma(A) = \mathbb C \setminus \rho(A)σ(A)=C∖ρ(A) is the spectrum. The discrete spectrum σd(A)\sigma_d(A)σd​(A) consists of the eigenvalues that are isolated points of σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A) and have finite-dimensional eigenspaces; the essential spectrum is σess(A)=σ(A)∖σd(A)\sigma_{ess}(A) = \sigma(A) \setminus \sigma_d(A)σess​(A)=σ(A)∖σd​(A). AAA is bounded from below if ⟨ψ,Aψ⟩≥γ∥ψ∥2\langle\psi, A\psi\rangle \ge \gamma\|\psi\|^2⟨ψ,Aψ⟩≥γ∥ψ∥2 on D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) for some γ∈R\gamma \in \mathbb Rγ∈R. BBB is AAA bounded if D(A)⊆D(B)\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(B)D(A)⊆D(B) and ∥Bψ∥≤a∥Aψ∥+b∥ψ∥\|B\psi\| \le a\|A\psi\| + b\|\psi\|∥Bψ∥≤a∥Aψ∥+b∥ψ∥; the infimum of admissible aaa is the AAA-bound. KKK is relatively compact with respect to AAA if KRA(z)K R_A(z)KRA​(z) is compact for one z∈ρ(A)z \in \rho(A)z∈ρ(A).

For an atom with NNN electrons at x=(x1,…,xN)∈R3Nx = (x_1, \dots, x_N) \in \mathbb R^{3N}x=(x1​,…,xN​)∈R3N, xj∈R3x_j \in \mathbb R^3xj​∈R3, and constants γne,γee>0\gamma_{ne}, \gamma_{ee} > 0γne​,γee​>0, the atomic Hamiltonian is

H(N)=−∑j=1NΔj−∑j=1Nγne∣xj∣+∑1≤j<k≤Nγee∣xj−xk∣,D(H(N))=H2(R3N).H^{(N)} = -\sum_{j=1}^N \Delta_j - \sum_{j=1}^N \frac{\gamma_{ne}}{|x_j|} + \sum_{1 \le j < k \le N} \frac{\gamma_{ee}}{|x_j - x_k|}, \qquad \mathfrak D(H^{(N)}) = H^2(\mathbb R^{3N}).H(N)=−j=1∑N​Δj​−j=1∑N​∣xj​∣γne​​+1≤j<k≤N∑​∣xj​−xk​∣γee​​,D(H(N))=H2(R3N).

H(N−1)H^{(N-1)}H(N−1) denotes the same operator for N−1N - 1N−1 electrons with the same constants.

Formalization targets

Goal: the HVZ theorem (Theorem 11.2)

For N≥1N \ge 1N≥1, H(N)H^{(N)}H(N) is bounded from below, and

σess(H(N))=[λN−1,∞),λN−1=min⁡σ(H(N−1)),\sigma_{ess}(H^{(N)}) = [\lambda^{N-1}, \infty), \qquad \lambda^{N-1} = \min \sigma(H^{(N-1)}),σess​(H(N))=[λN−1,∞),λN−1=minσ(H(N−1)),

with λN−1<0\lambda^{N-1} < 0λN−1<0 for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2. The minimum is attained and, for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, negative; both are part of the claim.

Milestones

  • Kato's theorem (Theorem 11.1). For real-valued Vk∈L∞∞(Rd)+L2(Rd)V_k \in L^\infty_\infty(\mathbb R^d) + L^2(\mathbb R^d)Vk​∈L∞∞​(Rd)+L2(Rd), d≤3d \le 3d≤3, composed with the first ddd coordinates of orthogonal transformations of RNd\mathbb R^{Nd}RNd, each Vk(y(k))V_k(y^{(k)})Vk​(y(k)) has H0H_0H0​-bound 000, and H=H0+∑kVk(y(k))H = H_0 + \sum_k V_k(y^{(k)})H=H0​+∑k​Vk​(y(k)) with D(H)=H2(RNd)\mathfrak D(H) = H^2(\mathbb R^{Nd})D(H)=H2(RNd) is self-adjoint with core C0∞(RNd)C_0^\infty(\mathbb R^{Nd})C0∞​(RNd).
  • IMS localization formula (Lemma 11.3). If φj∈C∞(Rn)\varphi_j \in C^\infty(\mathbb R^n)φj​∈C∞(Rn) satisfy ∑jφj2=1\sum_j \varphi_j^2 = 1∑j​φj2​=1, then for ψ∈H2(Rn)\psi \in H^2(\mathbb R^n)ψ∈H2(Rn)
Δψ=∑j(φjΔ(φjψ)+∣∂φj∣2ψ).\Delta\psi = \sum_{j} \big(\varphi_j\Delta(\varphi_j\psi) + |\partial\varphi_j|^2\psi\big).Δψ=j∑​(φj​Δ(φj​ψ)+∣∂φj​∣2ψ).
  • Localizing partition (Lemma 11.4). For C∈(0,1/N)C \in (0, 1/\sqrt N)C∈(0,1/N​) there are smooth φj:R3N→[0,1]\varphi_j : \mathbb R^{3N} \to [0,1]φj​:R3N→[0,1] with ∑jφj2=1\sum_j \varphi_j^2 = 1∑j​φj2​=1, supp⁡φj∩{∣x∣≥1}⊆{∣xj∣≥C∣x∣}\operatorname{supp}\varphi_j \cap \{|x| \ge 1\} \subseteq \{|x_j| \ge C|x|\}suppφj​∩{∣x∣≥1}⊆{∣xj​∣≥C∣x∣} and ∣∂φj(x)∣→0|\partial\varphi_j(x)| \to 0∣∂φj​(x)∣→0 as ∣x∣→∞|x| \to \infty∣x∣→∞.
  • A compactness criterion (Lemma 11.5). A multiplication operator VVV with H0H_0H0​-bound 000 and ∥χ{∣x∣≥R}VRH0(z)∥→0\|\chi_{\{|x| \ge R\}} V R_{H_0}(z)\| \to 0∥χ{∣x∣≥R}​VRH0​​(z)∥→0 as R→∞R \to \inftyR→∞ is relatively compact with respect to H0H_0H0​.

Significance

The result. The HVZ theorem separates the spectrum of an atom into a continuum [λN−1,∞)[\lambda^{N-1}, \infty)[λN−1,∞), fixed by the (N−1)(N-1)(N−1)-electron ion, and a discrete part below it consisting of bound states. The ionization energy of the atom is λN−λN−1\lambda^N - \lambda^{N-1}λN−λN−1. Questions such as whether a given atom or negative ion has a bound state at all, whether it has infinitely many (Zhislin's theorem for neutral atoms and positive ions), and how many electrons a nucleus can bind are all formulated relative to the threshold the HVZ theorem identifies. The same argument, with additional notation, covers molecules with fixed nuclei and general NNN-body systems.

Formalizing it. The results are classical and proved in the standard texts (Reed–Simon IV, Cycon–Froese–Kirsch–Simon, Teschl). None is formalized. Mathlib now has the unitary Fourier transform on L2L^2L2, tempered distributions and Sobolev spaces defined through the Fourier transform, but no self-adjoint Schrödinger operators, no essential spectrum and no many-body Hamiltonians. This mission asks for formal proofs of Teschl's four supporting results and of the HVZ theorem, and in doing so fixes a concrete representation of H0H_0H0​, of Coulomb-type multiplication operators and of the NNN-electron atom on which later work (bound states of atoms, scattering) can build.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for the essential spectrum of −Δ+V-\Delta + V−Δ+V, relative compactness of VVV followed by Weyl's theorem, is not available: γne/∣xj∣\gamma_{ne}/|x_j|γne​/∣xj​∣ does not vanish as ∣x∣→∞|x| \to \infty∣x∣→∞ in directions where xjx_jxj​ stays bounded, and it is not relatively compact with respect to H0H_0H0​ on L2(R3N)L^2(\mathbb R^{3N})L2(R3N). The inclusion σess(H(N))⊆[λN−1,∞)\sigma_{ess}(H^{(N)}) \subseteq [\lambda^{N-1}, \infty)σess​(H(N))⊆[λN−1,∞) therefore requires decomposing configuration space into regions in which one specific electron is far from the nucleus, controlling the error terms of that decomposition, and comparing the localized pieces with decoupled operators whose spectrum is known; this uses self-adjointness and relative bounds for operators built from the same potentials with one electron removed. The reverse inclusion requires approximate eigenfunctions built from those of H(N−1)H^{(N-1)}H(N−1) and of the free one-electron operator, and a statement that λN−1\lambda^{N-1}λN−1 is attained. Negativity of λN−1\lambda^{N-1}λN−1 needs the hydrogen-like ground state and a comparison argument across NNN.

Behind all of this sits the analytic layer: Kato's theorem requires that 1/∣x∣1/|x|1/∣x∣ in three dimensions is infinitesimally bounded with respect to −Δ-\Delta−Δ and that this survives the passage to R3N\mathbb R^{3N}R3N through an orthogonal change of variables; the IMS formula requires relating the Fourier definition of H0H_0H0​ to derivatives of products.

Formalization scope

The Hilbert space is Lp ℂ 2 volume over EuclideanSpace ℝ ι; for the atom, ι=Fin N × Fin 3\iota = \texttt{Fin N × Fin 3}ι=Fin N × Fin 3, so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm on R3N\mathbb R^{3N}R3N and xjx_jxj​ is electron x j. Operators are Mathlib LinearPMaps, self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint, and sums of unbounded operators are LinearPMap sums with the intersection of the domains. H0H_0H0​ (freeHamiltonian) is defined as F−1 (4π2∥ξ∥2) F\mathcal F^{-1}\,(4\pi^2\|\xi\|^2)\,\mathcal FF−1(4π2∥ξ∥2)F with Mathlib's unitary L2L^2L2 Fourier transform (kernel e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩e^{-2\pi i\langle x,\xi\rangle}e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩, no prefactor); this is the same operator −Δ-\Delta−Δ on the same domain H2H^2H2 as Teschl's F−1∣p∣2FF^{-1}|p|^2FF−1∣p∣2F. Multiplication operators (mulOp) have their maximal domains. H(N)H^{(N)}H(N) (atomicHamiltonian) is freeHamiltonian + mulOp V^{(N)}; the equality of its domain with H2(R3N)H^2(\mathbb R^{3N})H2(R3N) is a claim of Theorem 11.1, not an assumption. Resolvent set, spectrum, discrete and essential spectrum are defined from the bounded two-sided inverse of A−zA - zA−z, not from Mathlib's Banach-algebra spectrum. The AAA-bound takes values in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. The IMS formula is stated in the sense of distributions, tested against C0∞C_0^\inftyC0∞​ functions, since for merely smooth φj\varphi_jφj​ its right-hand side need not lie in L2L^2L2. No projection-valued measure or functional calculus is taken as data.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: λN−1\lambda^{N-1}λN−1 is defined as the minimum of the spectrum of the independently constructed (N−1)(N-1)(N−1)-electron operator, never as the infimum of σess(H(N))\sigma_{ess}(H^{(N)})σess​(H(N)), which would make (11.9) circular; its attainment and negativity are conclusions. The goal covers N≥1N \ge 1N≥1; for N=1N = 1N=1 the ion has no electrons, λ0=0\lambda^0 = 0λ0=0 is not negative, so the negativity of λN−1\lambda^{N-1}λN−1 is claimed for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2 only.

A complete development needs the L2L^2L2 theory of the Fourier transform and H2H^2H2, Hardy- or Sobolev-type bounds for 1/∣x∣1/|x|1/∣x∣ in R3\mathbb R^3R3, the Kato–Rellich theorem, Weyl's theorem on relatively compact perturbations, a smooth partition of unity on the sphere, and the Weyl criterion for essential spectrum. The definitions of H0H_0H0​, multiplication operators, resolvent and essential spectrum are shared with other chapters of this series and are intended for reuse; contributions of general lemmas about them are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, AMS, 2009, Chapter 11. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/099
  • G. M. Zhislin, Discussion of the spectrum of Schrödinger operators for systems of many particles, Trudy Moskovskogo Matematicheskogo Obshchestva 9 (1960), 81–120.
  • C. van Winter, Theory of finite systems of particles I. The Green function, Matematisk-Fysiske Skrifter Danske Videnskabernes Selskab 2 (1964), no. 8.
  • W. Hunziker, On the spectra of Schrödinger multiparticle Hamiltonians, Helvetica Physica Acta 39 (1966), 451–462.
  • T. Kato, Fundamental properties of Hamiltonian operators of Schrödinger type, Transactions of the AMS 70 (1951), 195–211. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1951-0041010-X
  • H. L. Cycon, R. G. Froese, W. Kirsch, B. Simon, Schrödinger Operators with Application to Quantum Mechanics and Global Geometry, Springer, 1987.
  • M. Reed and B. Simon, Methods of Modern Mathematical Physics IV: Analysis of Operators, Academic Press, 1978, Section XIII.5.
15 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisPure Mathematics·Captain: mikedeng1

Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables VIII: The Bergman KernelTextbook

Motivation

On a domain in Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn with n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 there is in general no Cauchy integral formula whose kernel is holomorphic in the evaluation point and independent of choices: the Bochner–Martinelli kernel works on every domain but is not holomorphic in the right variable. The Bergman kernel is the canonical replacement. It is attached to every domain U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn, it reproduces every square-integrable holomorphic function on UUU, and it is holomorphic in one variable and antiholomorphic in the other. Stefan Bergman introduced it in one and several variables in the 1920s–1930s (Bergman, The Kernel Function and Conformal Mapping, 1950). Aronszajn's theory of reproducing kernels (Aronszajn 1950) places it inside a general Hilbert-space framework. The kernel's boundary behaviour is the central tool in Fefferman's theorem that biholomorphisms between smoothly bounded strongly pseudoconvex domains extend smoothly to the boundary (Fefferman 1974).

This mission formalizes the construction of the kernel and its basic structure theory, following Chapter 5 of Jiří Lebl's Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables (version 4.4, 2026).

Setting

Write Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn for Fin n → ℂ and dVdVdV for Lebesgue measure on Cn≅R2n\mathbb{C}^n \cong \mathbb{R}^{2n}Cn≅R2n (volume). A domain is a connected open set U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn. The space L2(U)L^2(U)L2(U) consists of the square-integrable functions on UUU, modulo equality almost everywhere. It carries the inner product

⟨f,g⟩=∫Uf(z) g(z)‾ dV(z).\langle f, g \rangle = \int_U f(z)\,\overline{g(z)}\, dV(z).⟨f,g⟩=∫U​f(z)g(z)​dV(z).

The Bergman space bergmanSpace U is

A2(U)=O(U)∩L2(U).A^2(U) = \mathcal{O}(U) \cap L^2(U).A2(U)=O(U)∩L2(U).

It consists of those classes in L2(U)L^2(U)L2(U) that contain a function holomorphic on UUU (DifferentiableOn ℂ). It is a linear subspace of L2(U)L^2(U)L2(U) and carries the L2L^2L2 norm ∥f∥A2(U)\|f\|_{A^2(U)}∥f∥A2(U)​. For f∈A2(U)f \in A^2(U)f∈A2(U) and z∈Uz \in Uz∈U, f(z)f(z)f(z) denotes the value at zzz of the holomorphic function in the class (holoRep U f z). This value is unambiguous because UUU is open.

For z∈Uz \in Uz∈U, suppose there is an element kz∈A2(U)k_z \in A^2(U)kz​∈A2(U) with

f(z)=⟨f,kz⟩for all f∈A2(U).f(z) = \langle f, k_z \rangle \quad \text{for all } f \in A^2(U).f(z)=⟨f,kz​⟩for all f∈A2(U).

Such a kzk_zkz​ is unique (bergmanRepresenter U z). The Bergman kernel is then

KU(z,ζˉ)=kz(ζ)‾,(z,ζˉ)∈U×U∗,U∗={ζ:ζˉ∈U}.K_U(z, \bar\zeta) = \overline{k_z(\zeta)}, \qquad (z, \bar\zeta) \in U \times U^*, \quad U^* = \{\zeta : \bar\zeta \in U\}.KU​(z,ζˉ​)=kz​(ζ)​,(z,ζˉ​)∈U×U∗,U∗={ζ:ζˉ​∈U}.

In Lean, bergmanKernel U z ζ is KU(z,ζˉ)K_U(z, \bar\zeta)KU​(z,ζˉ​): the second argument is ζ\zetaζ itself, and pairs range over U×UU \times UU×U.

A family {φℓ}ℓ∈I\{\varphi_\ell\}_{\ell \in I}{φℓ​}ℓ∈I​ in A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U), over an arbitrary index set III, is a complete orthonormal system (IsCompleteOrthonormalSystem U φ) if it is orthonormal and its linear span is dense in A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 5.2.5 (p. 163)

Let U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn be a domain and let {φℓ}ℓ∈I\{\varphi_\ell\}_{\ell\in I}{φℓ​}ℓ∈I​ be a complete orthonormal system for A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U). Then

KU(z,ζˉ)=∑ℓ∈Iφℓ(z) φℓ(ζ)‾,K_U(z, \bar\zeta) = \sum_{\ell \in I} \varphi_\ell(z)\,\overline{\varphi_\ell(\zeta)},KU​(z,ζˉ​)=ℓ∈I∑​φℓ​(z)φℓ​(ζ)​,

with uniform convergence on compact subsets of U×U∗U \times U^*U×U∗. In Lean the conclusion reads as follows: for every compact L⊂U×UL \subset U \times UL⊂U×U, the finite partial sums over s⊂Is \subset Is⊂I converge to bergmanKernel U z ζ uniformly on LLL as sss increases along the finite subsets of III.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.2.1 (p. 161). For a domain UUU and compact K⊂UK \subset UK⊂U there is a constant CKC_KCK​ with sup⁡z∈K∣f(z)∣≤CK∥f∥A2(U)\sup_{z\in K}|f(z)| \le C_K \|f\|_{A^2(U)}supz∈K​∣f(z)∣≤CK​∥f∥A2(U)​ for all f∈A2(U)f \in A^2(U)f∈A2(U). Consequently, A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U) is complete.
  2. Eq. (5.1) (p. 162), the reproducing property. For f∈A2(U)f \in A^2(U)f∈A2(U) and z∈Uz \in Uz∈U,
f(z)=∫Uf(ζ) KU(z,ζˉ) dV(ζ),f(z) = \int_U f(\zeta)\,K_U(z, \bar\zeta)\, dV(\zeta),f(z)=∫U​f(ζ)KU​(z,ζˉ​)dV(ζ),

with integrable integrand. 3. Proposition 5.2.2 (p. 162). KU(z,ζˉ)K_U(z, \bar\zeta)KU​(z,ζˉ​) is holomorphic in zzz and antiholomorphic in ζ\zetaζ, and KU(z,ζˉ)‾=KU(ζ,zˉ)\overline{K_U(z, \bar\zeta)} = K_U(\zeta, \bar z)KU​(z,ζˉ​)​=KU​(ζ,zˉ).

Significance

The result itself. The Bergman kernel can rarely be written in closed form. Proposition 5.2.5 computes it from any orthonormal basis of A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U). For the unit ball, the normalized monomials give the closed form KBn(z,ζˉ)=n!πn(1−⟨z,ζ⟩)−(n+1)K_{\mathbb{B}_n}(z,\bar\zeta) = \frac{n!}{\pi^n}(1 - \langle z, \zeta\rangle)^{-(n+1)}KBn​​(z,ζˉ​)=πnn!​(1−⟨z,ζ⟩)−(n+1) (Exercises 5.2.9–5.2.10). For the polydisc they give a product of one-variable kernels (Exercise 5.2.8). The expansion is also the standard route to the kernel's positivity on the diagonal, KU(z,zˉ)=∑ℓ∣φℓ(z)∣2K_U(z,\bar z) = \sum_\ell |\varphi_\ell(z)|^2KU​(z,zˉ)=∑ℓ​∣φℓ​(z)∣2, and so to the Bergman metric. Lemma 5.2.1, the milestone underneath, is what makes A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U) a Hilbert space and point evaluation continuous. It is the reason a reproducing kernel exists at all.

Formalizing it. These results are classical and fully proved in the book. As far as a search of the platform shows, none of them has a machine-checked proof: Mathlib has L2L^2L2 spaces, Hilbert bases and the Riesz representation theorem, but no Bergman space. The platform's reproducing-kernel entries (Moore–Aronszajn, real-valued RKHS statements) start from a positive semidefinite kernel, which is the opposite direction and not about A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U). What remains is to formalize the known proofs, and to build a reusable Bergman-space layer on which the biholomorphic transformation law (Exercise 5.2.7) and explicit kernels could later be stated.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for the goal expands z↦KU(z,ζˉ)z \mapsto K_U(z, \bar\zeta)z↦KU​(z,ζˉ​) in the orthonormal system. For each fixed ζ\zetaζ, that expansion converges in L2L^2L2 in the variable zzz only. Upgrading L2L^2L2 convergence to uniform convergence on compacts in zzz needs Lemma 5.2.1. Uniformity in the pair (z,ζ)(z, \zeta)(z,ζ) is a further step: a bound for each fixed ζ\zetaζ does not give it, and the tails must be controlled simultaneously in both variables. The sum is over an arbitrary index set, so the convergence to be proved is that of an unordered sum, uniformly on a compact set.

On the formal side, elements of L2L^2L2 are equivalence classes. Every pointwise statement therefore passes through the holomorphic representative, and needs the fact that continuous functions agreeing almost everywhere on an open set agree on it. Lemma 5.2.1 needs the mean-value property on polydiscs, and Cauchy–Schwarz on a polydisc inside UUU. The kernel exists only once completeness of A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U) and the Riesz representation theorem are combined.

Formalization scope

  • Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn is Fin n → ℂ with volume, the product of Lebesgue measures on C≅R2\mathbb{C} \cong \mathbb{R}^2C≅R2; this is dVdVdV. No Euclidean ball or norm appears in any statement, so the sup norm on Fin n → ℂ plays no role.
  • A domain is IsOpen U ∧ IsConnected U. Holomorphic means DifferentiableOn ℂ on the open set UUU, which is equivalent to the book's Definition 1.1.2 by Osgood's lemma (Proposition 1.1.3, Theorem 1.2.1).
  • A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U) is a Submodule ℂ of Lp ℂ 2 (volume.restrict U), with the L2L^2L2 norm and inner product. Mathlib's inner product is conjugate-linear in its first argument. The book's ⟨f,g⟩\langle f, g\rangle⟨f,g⟩ is therefore written as an explicit integral ∫Uf gˉ dV\int_U f\,\bar g\,dV∫U​fgˉ​dV wherever the order matters (the definition of kzk_zkz​). Orthonormality does not depend on the convention.
  • bergmanKernel U z ζ means KU(z,ζˉ)K_U(z,\bar\zeta)KU​(z,ζˉ​). Compact subsets of U×U∗U\times U^*U×U∗ in the variables (z,ζˉ)(z,\bar\zeta)(z,ζˉ​) correspond to compact subsets of U×UU \times UU×U in the variables (z,ζ)(z,\zeta)(z,ζ).
  • The kernel is defined by choice: kzk_zkz​ is an element satisfying the reproducing identity, with fallback 000 if none exists. The fallback cannot make the goal trivially true: by Lemma 5.2.1 and Riesz a representer exists at every point of a domain, and the goal is equivalent to the book's statement for the actual kernel. The goal's convergence is uniform on compact sets, not merely pointwise, and the sum is unordered over an arbitrary index type. Replacing either by pointwise convergence or by a fixed enumeration would state a weaker theorem.
  • The reproducing property includes integrability of its integrand in its conclusion, so it cannot hold through the Bochner integral's default value 000.
  • Not included. Theorem 5.1.1 (Bochner–Martinelli) is not included. It needs integration of (n,n−1)(n,n-1)(n,n−1)-forms over a smooth boundary, which Mathlib lacks, and the goal does not use it. The Szegő kernel (§5.3) is sketched in the book without numbered results. Examples 5.2.3–5.2.4 and the exercises are not results and are not stated.

A complete development needs the following:

  • the mean-value property of holomorphic functions on polydiscs;
  • closedness of A2(U)A^2(U)A2(U) in L2(U)L^2(U)L2(U);
  • Riesz representation (InnerProductSpace.toDual);
  • expansions in Hilbert bases (HilbertBasis);
  • uniform convergence of unordered sums of functions on compact sets.

The Bergman-space layer (holomorphic representatives, continuity of point evaluation, the kernel) is reusable for any later work on Bergman metrics, transformation laws or explicit kernels. Contributions of that layer as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Lebl, Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables: A Whirlwind Tour of the Subject, version 4.4, 2026, Chapter 5. https://www.jirka.org/scv/scv.pdf
  • S. Bergman, The Kernel Function and Conformal Mapping, Mathematical Surveys 5, American Mathematical Society, 1950 (2nd ed. 1970). https://doi.org/10.1090/surv/005
  • N. Aronszajn, Theory of reproducing kernels, Transactions of the American Mathematical Society 68 (1950), 337–404. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1950-0051437-7
  • C. Fefferman, The Bergman kernel and biholomorphic mappings of pseudoconvex domains, Inventiones Mathematicae 26 (1974), 1–65. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01406845
8 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations XII: Friedrichs Symmetric Systems — Weak Equals StrongTextbook

Motivation

Many systems of first-order partial differential equations arising in physics — linear acoustics, Maxwell's equations, linearized gas dynamics, the Tricomi equation of transonic flow — can be written as symmetric systems Ai∂iu+Cu=fA^i\partial_i u + Cu = fAi∂i​u+Cu=f with symmetric coefficient matrices AiA^iAi. K. O. Friedrichs showed in 1958 (Friedrichs 1958) that a single energy argument gives existence and uniqueness for boundary value problems of this form under positivity conditions on the equation and the boundary condition, regardless of whether the system is elliptic, hyperbolic or of mixed type. The theory is the subject of Chapter 8 of J. K. Hunter's Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis, revised 6/18/2014), which this mission follows.

The core analytic tool of the theory is older. In 1944 Friedrichs introduced mollifiers precisely to prove that weak and strong extensions of differential operators coincide (Friedrichs 1944); the key estimate is a bound on the commutator of a mollifier with a first-order operator with Lipschitz coefficients. Lax and Phillips (1960) developed the boundary version for dissipative symmetric operators.

Setting

Write points of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn as x=(x1,…,xn)x = (x_1, \dots, x_n)x=(x1​,…,xn​) and give Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm its Euclidean norm ∣w∣|w|∣w∣. Let A1,…,An,C:Rn→Rm×mA^1, \dots, A^n, C : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^{m\times m}A1,…,An,C:Rn→Rm×m be matrix-valued coefficients. The first-order operator and its formal adjoint are (summation over iii)

Lu=Ai∂iu+Cu,L∗v=−Ai∂iv+CTv−(∂iAi)v.Lu = A^i\partial_i u + Cu, \qquad L^*v = -A^i\partial_i v + C^Tv - (\partial_i A^i)v .Lu=Ai∂i​u+Cu,L∗v=−Ai∂i​v+CTv−(∂i​Ai)v.

A mollifier profile is a C∞C^\inftyC∞, compactly supported, non-negative, radially symmetric η:Rn→R\eta : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}η:Rn→R with ∫η=1\int \eta = 1∫η=1. For ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 set ηε(x)=ε−nη(x/ε)\eta_\varepsilon(x) = \varepsilon^{-n}\eta(x/\varepsilon)ηε​(x)=ε−nη(x/ε) and define the smoothing operator Jεu=ηε∗uJ_\varepsilon u = \eta_\varepsilon * uJε​u=ηε​∗u. The commutator [Jε,L]u=Jε(Lu)−L(Jεu)[J_\varepsilon, L]u = J_\varepsilon(Lu) - L(J_\varepsilon u)[Jε​,L]u=Jε​(Lu)−L(Jε​u) is defined for u∈Cc1(Rn;Rm)u \in C^1_c(\mathbb{R}^n;\mathbb{R}^m)u∈Cc1​(Rn;Rm).

For the boundary value problem, Ω⊆Rn\Omega \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊆Rn is a bounded open set with C2C^2C2-boundary, ν\nuν its outward unit normal, and the problem is

Ai∂iu+Cu=f  in Ω,B−u=0  on ∂Ω,A^i\partial_iu + Cu = f \ \text{ in } \Omega, \qquad B_-u = 0 \ \text{ on } \partial\Omega,Ai∂i​u+Cu=f  in Ω,B−​u=0  on ∂Ω,

with boundary matrix B=νiAiB = \nu_iA^iB=νi​Ai. The system is positive symmetric with constant c>0c > 0c>0 if the AiA^iAi are symmetric and C+CT−∂iAi≥2cIC + C^T - \partial_iA^i \ge 2cIC+CT−∂i​Ai≥2cI in Ω\OmegaΩ. The boundary condition is maximally positive if BBB is nonsingular on ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω and there is a matrix function MMM on ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω with B±=12(B±M)B_\pm = \tfrac12(B \pm M)B±​=21​(B±M), M+MT≥0M + M^T \ge 0M+MT≥0 and Rm=ker⁡B+⊕ker⁡B−\mathbb{R}^m = \ker B_+ \oplus \ker B_-Rm=kerB+​⊕kerB−​. A weak solution with data f∈L2(Ω;Rm)f \in L^2(\Omega;\mathbb{R}^m)f∈L2(Ω;Rm) is u∈L2(Ω;Rm)u \in L^2(\Omega;\mathbb{R}^m)u∈L2(Ω;Rm) with ∫ΩuTL∗v=∫ΩfTv\int_\Omega u^TL^*v = \int_\Omega f^Tv∫Ω​uTL∗v=∫Ω​fTv for every v∈D∗={v∈C1(Ω‾):B+Tv=0 on ∂Ω}v \in D^* = \{v \in C^1(\overline\Omega) : B_+^Tv = 0 \text{ on } \partial\Omega\}v∈D∗={v∈C1(Ω):B+T​v=0 on ∂Ω}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Friedrichs' commutator lemma (Lemma 8.11)

Let Ai∈Cc1(Rn;Rm×m)A^i \in C^1_c(\mathbb{R}^n;\mathbb{R}^{m\times m})Ai∈Cc1​(Rn;Rm×m) and C∈Cc(Rn;Rm×m)C \in C_c(\mathbb{R}^n;\mathbb{R}^{m\times m})C∈Cc​(Rn;Rm×m). For each ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 the commutator [Jε,L]:Cc1→L2[J_\varepsilon, L] : C^1_c \to L^2[Jε​,L]:Cc1​→L2 extends to a bounded operator [Jε,L]‾\overline{[J_\varepsilon, L]}[Jε​,L]​ on L2(Rn;Rm)L^2(\mathbb{R}^n;\mathbb{R}^m)L2(Rn;Rm), and

sup⁡ε>0∥[Jε,L]‾∥L2→L2<∞,[Jε,L]‾ u→0  in L2 as ε→0+  for every u∈L2.\sup_{\varepsilon > 0}\big\|\overline{[J_\varepsilon, L]}\big\|_{L^2\to L^2} < \infty, \qquad \overline{[J_\varepsilon, L]}\,u \to 0 \ \text{ in } L^2 \text{ as } \varepsilon \to 0^+ \ \text{ for every } u \in L^2 .ε>0sup​​[Jε​,L]​​L2→L2​<∞,[Jε​,L]​u→0  in L2 as ε→0+  for every u∈L2.

The goal asserts only the shape: a uniform bound exists, with no value fixed.

Milestones: energy estimates and existence (Theorems 8.6, 8.9, Corollary 8.7)

Under the smoothness, positivity and maximal positivity conditions above, with ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ the L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω) norm,

c∥u∥≤∥Lu∥  (u∈C1(Ω‾), B−u=0),c∥v∥≤∥L∗v∥  (v∈C1(Ω‾), B+Tv=0);c\|u\| \le \|Lu\| \ \ (u \in C^1(\overline\Omega),\ B_-u = 0), \qquad c\|v\| \le \|L^*v\| \ \ (v \in C^1(\overline\Omega),\ B_+^Tv = 0);c∥u∥≤∥Lu∥  (u∈C1(Ω), B−​u=0),c∥v∥≤∥L∗v∥  (v∈C1(Ω), B+T​v=0);

smooth solutions are unique; and for every f∈L2(Ω)f \in L^2(\Omega)f∈L2(Ω) a weak solution exists.

Significance

The commutator lemma is what turns weak solutions into strong ones: mollifying a weak solution produces smooth functions that solve the equation up to an error [Jε,L]u[J_\varepsilon, L]u[Jε​,L]u, and the lemma says this error vanishes in the limit. Friedrichs' "weak equals strong" theorem (Theorem 8.12 of the notes), the uniqueness of weak solutions (Corollary 8.13), and much of the L2L^2L2 theory of hyperbolic systems and pseudo-differential commutator estimates rest on it. The energy estimates of Theorem 8.6 and the existence theorem 8.9 are the two halves of the Friedrichs theory that do not need mollification: an a priori bound for smooth functions satisfying the boundary condition, and existence by duality.

All of these results are classical and proved. As far as a search of the platform and of Mathlib shows, none is formalized: Mathlib has convolution, ContDiffBump mollifiers and LpL^pLp spaces, but no commutator estimates, no divergence theorem on C2C^2C2 domains, and no Friedrichs systems. The mission would produce the first machine-checked commutator estimate for mollifiers and first-order operators with Lipschitz coefficients, and the first formal treatment of positive symmetric boundary value problems.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for the goal — bound Jε(Ai∂iu)J_\varepsilon(A^i\partial_iu)Jε​(Ai∂i​u) and Ai∂i(Jεu)A^i\partial_i(J_\varepsilon u)Ai∂i​(Jε​u) separately — fails: each term involves ∂iu\partial_i u∂i​u, which is not controlled by ∥u∥L2\|u\|_{L^2}∥u∥L2​, and each is of size ε−1∥u∥\varepsilon^{-1}\|u\|ε−1∥u∥ after moving the derivative onto ηε\eta_\varepsilonηε​. Only the difference is bounded, and only because the coefficient difference Ai(y)−Ai(x)A^i(y) - A^i(x)Ai(y)−Ai(x) is of size ∣x−y∣≲ε|x - y| \lesssim \varepsilon∣x−y∣≲ε on the support of ηε(x−y)\eta_\varepsilon(x - y)ηε​(x−y). The cancellation between the two terms is the whole content of the uniform bound. Convergence to zero on smooth compactly supported uuu is easy, but it does not by itself give convergence on all of L2L^2L2.

For the milestones, the central difficulty is Green's theorem: the energy identity requires the divergence theorem on a bounded C2C^2C2 domain for C1C^1C1 vector fields, with the outward normal and surface measure, none of which Mathlib provides for general domains.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn and Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m), so ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ is Euclidean and L2(Rn;Rm)L^2(\mathbb{R}^n;\mathbb{R}^m)L2(Rn;Rm) is Lp (EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m)) 2 volume. Coordinates are 0-based: A i is Ai+1A^{i+1}Ai+1.
  • The goal takes a family T : ℝ → (L² →L[ℝ] L²). "Extends" means: for ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 and every u∈Cc1u \in C^1_cu∈Cc1​, T ε applied to the class of uuu agrees a.e. with the pointwise commutator. Because Cc1C^1_cCc1​ is dense in L2L^2L2, this pins down each T ε; a bound stated on Cc1C^1_cCc1​ only would be weaker than the lemma and is not what is asked.
  • The lemma is stated for every mollifier profile, which includes the bump (1.5) of the notes. C∞C^\inftyC∞ means ContDiff ℝ ∞ (smooth, not analytic).
  • A bounded open set with C2C^2C2-boundary is one with a global C2C^2C2 defining function ρ\rhoρ (Ω={ρ<0}\Omega = \{\rho < 0\}Ω={ρ<0}, ∇ρ≠0\nabla\rho \ne 0∇ρ=0 on {ρ=0}\{\rho = 0\}{ρ=0}); for bounded sets this is equivalent to the chart definition of the notes. The outward normal is ∇ρ/∣∇ρ∣\nabla\rho/|\nabla\rho|∇ρ/∣∇ρ∣, which does not depend on ρ\rhoρ. It is not a free function argument.
  • C1(Ω‾)C^1(\overline\Omega)C1(Ω) is modelled by C1C^1C1 functions on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. For C2C^2C2 domains their restrictions are exactly C1(Ω‾)C^1(\overline\Omega)C1(Ω).
  • The printed Definition 8.5 sets B±=B±MB_\pm = B \pm MB±​=B±M and also B=B++B−B = B_+ + B_-B=B+​+B−​, which would force B=0B = 0B=0. The formalization uses B±=12(B±M)B_\pm = \tfrac12(B \pm M)B±​=21​(B±M), Friedrichs' normalisation. This gives the same kernels ker⁡B±\ker B_\pmkerB±​, so the same boundary conditions.
  • L2L^2L2 norms are eLpNorm · 2 in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so no integrability condition is hidden in the estimates.

Needed infrastructure: Young's convolution inequality on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, density of Cc1C^1_cCc1​ in L2L^2L2, differentiation under the convolution integral, and, for the milestones, the divergence theorem on bounded C2C^2C2 domains together with the Riesz representation theorem. The divergence theorem on C2C^2C2 domains, and the commutator estimate itself, are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, Chapter 8. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • K. O. Friedrichs, The identity of weak and strong extensions of differential operators, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 55 (1944), 132–151. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1944-0009701-0
  • K. O. Friedrichs, Symmetric positive linear differential equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 11 (1958), 333–418. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160110306
  • P. D. Lax and R. S. Phillips, Local boundary conditions for dissipative symmetric linear differential operators, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 13 (1960), 427–455. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160130307
8 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations XI: Existence and Uniqueness of Weak Solutions of Hyperbolic PDEsTextbook

Motivation

Hyperbolic partial differential equations model waves: acoustic, elastic, electromagnetic and gravitational. Their qualitative behaviour differs sharply from that of parabolic equations. They have finite speed of propagation, they are reversible in time, and they do not smooth their data: a singularity in the initial state is transported, not damped. The analytical consequence is that energy estimates for hyperbolic equations are weaker than for parabolic ones, and the existence theory has to be run in spaces that carry exactly one derivative's worth of information.

This mission formalizes the energy-space well-posedness theory for linear second-order hyperbolic equations with time-dependent coefficients, following Chapter 7 of J. K. Hunter's lecture notes Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis, revised 6/18/2014). The same theory appears in L. C. Evans, Partial Differential Equations, §7.2, and goes back to the Galerkin and energy methods of J.-L. Lions and E. Magenes.

Setting

Let Ω⊂Rn\Omega \subset \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊂Rn be a bounded open set and T>0T > 0T>0. A test function is a smooth function with compact support in Ω\OmegaΩ; the Sobolev space H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω) is the closure of the test functions in the norm ∥u∥H01=(∫Ω(u2+∣Du∣2) dx)1/2\|u\|_{H^1_0} = \big(\int_\Omega (u^2 + |Du|^2)\,dx\big)^{1/2}∥u∥H01​​=(∫Ω​(u2+∣Du∣2)dx)1/2, where DuDuDu is the weak gradient. L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω) carries the inner product (u,v)L2=∫Ωuv dx(u,v)_{L^2} = \int_\Omega uv\,dx(u,v)L2​=∫Ω​uvdx, and H−1(Ω)=H01(Ω)′H^{-1}(\Omega) = H^1_0(\Omega)'H−1(Ω)=H01​(Ω)′ is the dual space with pairing ⟨f,v⟩\langle f, v \rangle⟨f,v⟩. There are embeddings H01(Ω)↪L2(Ω)↪H−1(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega) \hookrightarrow L^2(\Omega) \hookrightarrow H^{-1}(\Omega)H01​(Ω)↪L2(Ω)↪H−1(Ω).

The operator is

Lu=−∑i,j=1n∂i(aij(x,t) ∂ju)+c(x,t) u,Lu = -\sum_{i,j=1}^n \partial_i\big(a^{ij}(x,t)\,\partial_j u\big) + c(x,t)\,u,Lu=−i,j=1∑n​∂i​(aij(x,t)∂j​u)+c(x,t)u,

with bilinear form a(u,v;t)=∑i,j∫Ωaij∂iu ∂jv dx+∫Ωc uv dxa(u,v;t) = \sum_{i,j}\int_\Omega a^{ij}\partial_i u\,\partial_j v\,dx + \int_\Omega c\,uv\,dxa(u,v;t)=∑i,j​∫Ω​aij∂i​u∂j​vdx+∫Ω​cuvdx on H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω), and ata_tat​ is the same form built from the time derivatives atija^{ij}_tatij​, ctc_tct​. Assumption 7.1 requires aij,c,atij,ct∈L∞(Ω×(0,T))a^{ij}, c, a^{ij}_t, c_t \in L^\infty(\Omega\times(0,T))aij,c,atij​,ct​∈L∞(Ω×(0,T)), aij=ajia^{ij} = a^{ji}aij=aji, and uniform ellipticity: ∑i,jaijξiξj≥θ∣ξ∣2\sum_{i,j} a^{ij}\xi_i\xi_j \ge \theta|\xi|^2∑i,j​aijξi​ξj​≥θ∣ξ∣2 for some θ>0\theta > 0θ>0.

A vector-valued function u:(0,T)→Xu : (0,T) \to Xu:(0,T)→X has weak time derivative www if ∫0Tφ′(t)u(t) dt=−∫0Tφ(t)w(t) dt\int_0^T \varphi'(t)u(t)\,dt = -\int_0^T \varphi(t)w(t)\,dt∫0T​φ′(t)u(t)dt=−∫0T​φ(t)w(t)dt for all test functions φ\varphiφ on (0,T)(0,T)(0,T), the integrals being Bochner integrals. The problem is

utt+Lu=f in Ω×(0,T),u=0 on ∂Ω×(0,T),u=g, ut=h at t=0.(7.5)u_{tt} + Lu = f \text{ in } \Omega\times(0,T), \qquad u = 0 \text{ on } \partial\Omega\times(0,T), \qquad u = g,\ u_t = h \text{ at } t = 0. \qquad (7.5)utt​+Lu=f in Ω×(0,T),u=0 on ∂Ω×(0,T),u=g, ut​=h at t=0.(7.5)

A weak solution (Definition 7.2) is a function u:[0,T]→H01(Ω)u : [0,T] \to H^1_0(\Omega)u:[0,T]→H01​(Ω) with weak derivatives utu_tut​, uttu_{tt}utt​ such that u∈C([0,T];H01)u \in C([0,T];H^1_0)u∈C([0,T];H01​), ut∈C([0,T];L2)u_t \in C([0,T];L^2)ut​∈C([0,T];L2), utt∈L2(0,T;H−1)u_{tt} \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1})utt​∈L2(0,T;H−1), and for every v∈H01(Ω)v \in H^1_0(\Omega)v∈H01​(Ω)

⟨utt(t),v⟩+a(u(t),v;t)=(f(t),v)L2for a.e. t,\langle u_{tt}(t), v\rangle + a(u(t), v; t) = (f(t), v)_{L^2} \quad \text{for a.e. } t,⟨utt​(t),v⟩+a(u(t),v;t)=(f(t),v)L2​for a.e. t,

with u(0)=gu(0) = gu(0)=g and ut(0)=hu_t(0) = hut​(0)=h.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.3

Under Assumption 7.1 there is a constant CCC, depending only on Ω\OmegaΩ, TTT and the coefficients, such that for every f∈L2(0,T;L2(Ω))f \in L^2(0,T;L^2(\Omega))f∈L2(0,T;L2(Ω)), g∈H01(Ω)g \in H^1_0(\Omega)g∈H01​(Ω), h∈L2(Ω)h \in L^2(\Omega)h∈L2(Ω) there is a unique weak solution, and

∥u∥L∞(0,T;H01)+∥ut∥L∞(0,T;L2)+∥utt∥L2(0,T;H−1)≤C(∥f∥L2(0,T;L2)+∥g∥H01+∥h∥L2).\|u\|_{L^\infty(0,T;H^1_0)} + \|u_t\|_{L^\infty(0,T;L^2)} + \|u_{tt}\|_{L^2(0,T;H^{-1})} \le C\big(\|f\|_{L^2(0,T;L^2)} + \|g\|_{H^1_0} + \|h\|_{L^2}\big).∥u∥L∞(0,T;H01​)​+∥ut​∥L∞(0,T;L2)​+∥utt​∥L2(0,T;H−1)​≤C(∥f∥L2(0,T;L2)​+∥g∥H01​​+∥h∥L2​).

Milestones

  • Proposition 7.5. For every NNN, the Galerkin problem projected onto the span ENE_NEN​ of the first NNN Dirichlet eigenfunctions has a unique approximate solution uN∈C1([0,T];EN)u_N \in C^1([0,T];E_N)uN​∈C1([0,T];EN​) with uNtt∈L2(0,T;EN)u_{Ntt} \in L^2(0,T;E_N)uNtt​∈L2(0,T;EN​).
  • Proposition 7.6. The approximate solutions satisfy the energy estimate of Theorem 7.3 with a constant independent of NNN.
  • Lemma 7.8. If V↪H\mathcal{V} \hookrightarrow \mathcal{H}V↪H is a dense continuous embedding of Hilbert spaces, u∈L∞(0,T;V)u \in L^\infty(0,T;\mathcal{V})u∈L∞(0,T;V) and ut∈L2(0,T;H)u_t \in L^2(0,T;\mathcal{H})ut​∈L2(0,T;H), then uuu is weakly continuous into V\mathcal{V}V.
  • Lemma 7.10. If u∈L2(0,T;H01)u \in L^2(0,T;H^1_0)u∈L2(0,T;H01​), ut∈L2(0,T;L2)u_t \in L^2(0,T;L^2)ut​∈L2(0,T;L2), utt∈L2(0,T;H−1)u_{tt} \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1})utt​∈L2(0,T;H−1) and utt+Lu∈L2(0,T;L2)u_{tt} + Lu \in L^2(0,T;L^2)utt​+Lu∈L2(0,T;L2), then
12ddt(∥ut∥L22+a(u,u;t))=(utt+Lu,ut)L2+12at(u,u;t),\tfrac12 \tfrac{d}{dt}\big(\|u_t\|^2_{L^2} + a(u,u;t)\big) = (u_{tt}+Lu, u_t)_{L^2} + \tfrac12 a_t(u,u;t),21​dtd​(∥ut​∥L22​+a(u,u;t))=(utt​+Lu,ut​)L2​+21​at​(u,u;t),

and the energy is absolutely continuous.

  • Proposition 7.12. Weak solutions in the sense of Definition 7.2 are unique.

Significance

Theorem 7.3 is the basic well-posedness result for linear wave equations in inhomogeneous, time-dependent media in the natural energy space. It is the starting point for the regularity theory of such solutions, for finite-speed-of-propagation arguments in a weak setting, and for fixed-point constructions for semilinear wave equations, which linearize around a known solution and need exactly this estimate with a constant depending only on the coefficients. Lemma 7.8 and Lemma 7.10 are general tools that recur in evolution equations: the first converts uniform-in-time bounds into weak continuity, the second justifies an energy identity for solutions too rough to differentiate directly.

The results are classical and fully proved in the literature, and to our knowledge no machine-checked version exists. Formalizing them requires vector-valued Sobolev spaces in time, Bochner-integral weak derivatives and duality arguments. These are largely absent from Mathlib and would be reused by any formal treatment of evolution equations, parabolic ones included.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, testing the equation with utu_tut​ to obtain energy conservation, is not available for weak solutions: ut(t)u_t(t)ut​(t) lies only in L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω), not in H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω), so the pairing a(u,ut;t)a(u, u_t; t)a(u,ut​;t) is undefined. This affects both halves of the theorem. For existence, the energy estimate holds only for the finite-dimensional approximations, and the limit is obtained in weak-star topologies of L∞L^\inftyL∞ in time, which give neither continuity in time nor the initial conditions directly. For uniqueness, a different test function is needed. The continuity requirements of Definition 7.2 are an essential part of the statement, not a technicality, and establishing them for the constructed solution is a large part of the work.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with Lebesgue measure; coordinates are 0-based. H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω) is modelled by jets (u,Du)(u, Du)(u,Du): the closure of {(φ,∇φ)}\{(\varphi, \nabla\varphi)\}{(φ,∇φ)} in L2(Ω;R×Rn)L^2(\Omega;\mathbb{R}\times\mathbb{R}^n)L2(Ω;R×Rn), with norm exactly (∫Ωu2+∣Du∣2)1/2\big(\int_\Omega u^2 + |Du|^2\big)^{1/2}(∫Ω​u2+∣Du∣2)1/2. H−1(Ω)H^{-1}(\Omega)H−1(Ω) is StrongDual ℝ (H10 n Ω), and f∈L2f \in L^2f∈L2 acts by v↦(f,v)L2v \mapsto (f, v)_{L^2}v↦(f,v)L2​.
  • Time-dependent objects are functions on R\mathbb{R}R. Only values on (0,T)(0,T)(0,T) (integrability, weak derivatives) or [0,T][0,T][0,T] (continuity, initial values) matter. utu_tut​ is the weak derivative of uuu regarded in L2L^2L2, and uttu_{tt}utt​ that of utu_tut​ regarded in H−1H^{-1}H−1. Local integrability is built into the weak derivative, so no Bochner integral takes the junk value 000.
  • Coefficients are functions of (x,t)(x,t)(x,t), bundled with their time derivatives. Assumption 7.1 requires those to be weak time derivatives on Ω×(0,T)\Omega\times(0,T)Ω×(0,T). Symmetry and ellipticity hold almost everywhere there, the meaning for L∞L^\inftyL∞ coefficients. The consequences (7.7) of Assumption 7.1 are not assumed.
  • Norms in the estimates are ℝ≥0∞-valued (eLpNorm, ‖·‖ₑ), and the constants are finite (ℝ≥0). Each constant is quantified before the data f,g,hf, g, hf,g,h; in Proposition 7.6 it also precedes the eigenbasis and NNN.
  • The Galerkin basis is any L2L^2L2-orthonormal basis of weak Dirichlet eigenfunctions, indexed from 000.
  • Two misprints are corrected. The first integral of (7.6) has ∂jv\partial_j v∂j​v, not ∂ju\partial_j u∂j​u. The energy (7.16) is ∥ut∥L22+a(u,u;t)\|u_t\|^2_{L^2} + a(u,u;t)∥ut​∥L22​+a(u,u;t), with the square that (7.19) uses.
  • Lemma 7.10 is stated in integrated form. The right-hand side of (7.19) is integrable, and the energy equals a constant plus its integral for a.e. ttt. This is the identity together with absolute continuity.
  • A trivializing formalization is excluded. Definition 7.2 keeps all three regularity classes and both initial conditions, and uniqueness and the estimate are asserted for the object of that definition. A definition without the continuity classes would admit non-solutions.

A complete development needs Bochner-valued Sobolev spaces on an interval, Banach–Alaoglu in L∞(0,T;X)=L1(0,T;X′)′L^\infty(0,T;X) = L^1(0,T;X')'L∞(0,T;X)=L1(0,T;X′)′, linear ODE systems with L∞L^\inftyL∞ coefficients, Gronwall's inequality, and the spectral theory of the Dirichlet Laplacian. The time-dependent function-space layer is reusable for parabolic and Schrödinger-type equations. Contributions of general lemmas on vector-valued weak derivatives are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, Chapter 7. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • L. C. Evans, Partial Differential Equations, 2nd ed., Graduate Studies in Mathematics 19, AMS, 2010, §7.2. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/019
  • J.-L. Lions and E. Magenes, Non-Homogeneous Boundary Value Problems and Applications, Vol. I, Springer, 1972, Chapter 3. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-65161-8
10 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Group Theory·Captain: dbenbenn

Garrido Amenable Groups I: Invariant Means and the Følner ConditionTextbook

This mission formalizes A. Garrido, An introduction to amenable groups, lecture notes from four talks at the Oxford Advanced Class in Algebra, Michaelmas 2013 (archived PDF) — its Section 1.2, Section 2 and Section 3.

Motivation

A group is amenable when its subsets can be measured in a way that translation does not disturb. Von Neumann isolated the notion in 1929 to explain the Banach–Tarski paradox: a solid ball in R3\mathbb{R}^3R3 can be cut into finitely many pieces and reassembled into two balls of the original size, and the reason is group-theoretic rather than geometric — the rotation group SO(3,R)SO(3,\mathbb{R})SO(3,R) contains a free group of rank two, while the isometry groups of R\mathbb{R}R and R2\mathbb{R}^2R2 do not. No paradox is possible for a group carrying a translation-invariant finitely additive probability measure.

Mahlon Day proved in the 1950s that von Neumann's definition agrees with the existence of an invariant mean on bounded functions, moving the theory into functional analysis, and coined the word "amenable" as a pun on "mean"; the problem below was first stated in print, with von Neumann's name attached, in Day's 1957 paper. Følner gave a combinatorial criterion — a group is amenable exactly when it has finite subsets almost invariant under translation — now usually taken as the definition, and the link to growth.

The organizing question of the classical theory was the von Neumann–Day problem: writing EGEGEG for the elementary amenable groups, AGAGAG for the amenable groups and NFNFNF for the groups with no free subgroup of rank two, one has EG⊆AG⊆NFEG \subseteq AG \subseteq NFEG⊆AG⊆NF, and both inclusions were asked to be equalities. Both are strict. Ol'shanskii (1980) showed AG≠NFAG \neq NFAG=NF, and Grigorchuk (1985) showed EG≠AGEG \neq AGEG=AG with a group of intermediate growth. Chou (1980) supplied the structural facts about EGEGEG that the separation rests on.

Amenability is now basic vocabulary in geometric group theory, ergodic theory and operator algebras.

Setting

Let GGG be a discrete group. A measure on GGG, in von Neumann's sense, is a function μ\muμ assigning a value to every subset of GGG — not merely to a distinguished σ\sigmaσ-algebra — such that

μ(G)=1,μ(A⊔B)=μ(A)+μ(B),μ(gA)=μ(A)\mu(G) = 1, \qquad \mu(A \sqcup B) = \mu(A) + \mu(B), \qquad \mu(gA) = \mu(A)μ(G)=1,μ(A⊔B)=μ(A)+μ(B),μ(gA)=μ(A)

for all g∈Gg \in Gg∈G and all disjoint A,B⊆GA, B \subseteq GA,B⊆G. Only finite additivity is required; countable additivity together with invariance is impossible for a countably infinite group. GGG is amenable if such a μ\muμ exists.

Two reformulations matter. A left-invariant mean is a positive linear functional mmm on the bounded real functions ℓ∞(G)\ell^\infty(G)ℓ∞(G) with m(1)=1m(\mathbf{1}) = 1m(1)=1 and m(gf)=m(f)m({}_g f) = m(f)m(g​f)=m(f), where gf(h)=f(g−1h){}_g f(h) = f(g^{-1}h)g​f(h)=f(g−1h). And GGG satisfies the Følner condition if for every finite A⊆GA \subseteq GA⊆G and every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there is a finite nonempty F⊆GF \subseteq GF⊆G with

∣aF △ F∣∣F∣≤εfor every a∈A,\frac{|aF \,\triangle\, F|}{|F|} \le \varepsilon \qquad \text{for every } a \in A,∣F∣∣aF△F∣​≤εfor every a∈A,

where △\triangle△ is symmetric difference. In the Cayley graph this says FFF has small boundary relative to its size.

Against amenability stands paradoxicality. Two subsets A,BA, BA,B of a GGG-set XXX are GGG-equidecomposable, written A∼BA \sim BA∼B, if AAA can be cut into finitely many pieces which, after each is moved by a single element of GGG, reassemble to BBB; and E⊆XE \subseteq XE⊆X is GGG-paradoxical if it has two disjoint proper subsets each equidecomposable with EEE itself. A group that is paradoxical under left translation admits no invariant measure.

Formalization targets

Goal — Theorem 3.6

G satisfies the Følner condition  ⟺  G is amenableG \text{ satisfies the Følner condition} \iff G \text{ is amenable}G satisfies the Følner condition⟺G is amenable

This is the goal because it bridges the combinatorial and measure-theoretic sides of the subject, and every later application of amenability to growth uses it in one direction or the other.

Supporting equivalences — Theorems 1.15 and 2.7

For a group GGG, these four are equivalent: GGG is amenable; there is a left-invariant mean on ℓ∞(G)\ell^\infty(G)ℓ∞(G); GGG is not paradoxical; and GGG has the invariant extension property.

Closure properties — Proposition 2.2

Amenability passes to subgroups and quotients, is closed under extensions, and is closed under directed unions; hence all abelian and all virtually solvable groups are amenable, and EG⊆AGEG \subseteq AGEG⊆AG.

Significance

Each of the three equivalent pictures serves a different purpose: the measure gives non-paradoxicality, the mean gives access to functional analysis and fixed-point arguments, and the Følner condition is what one can verify for a concrete group. Theorem 3.8 is the typical consequence — a group of subexponential growth is amenable — proved by exhibiting the balls of the word metric as a Følner sequence, which only the equivalence licenses.

Mathlib has very little of this. It names no definition of amenability: FoelnerFilter.lean says one "has not yet been given" for want of "a general consensus" on the right generality, and writes the property out inline in the conclusion of IsFoelner.amenable, which is one direction of the goal. Equidecomp.lean has the equidecomposition machinery, with a TODO asking for the Schröder–Bernstein theorem for equidecomposability that is Theorem 1.2 here.

This mission supplies the missing definitions, that Schröder–Bernstein theorem, the closure properties, and the direction of the Følner equivalence that is genuinely open. Nothing here is a new mathematical result: all of it is classical, and the work is formalization.

Difficulty

The Følner-implies-amenable direction is the easier one, and the natural construction almost works: given a Følner sequence FnF_nFn​, set μ(B)=lim⁡n∣B∩Fn∣/∣Fn∣\mu(B) = \lim_n |B \cap F_n| / |F_n|μ(B)=limn​∣B∩Fn​∣/∣Fn​∣. That limit need not exist. It must be replaced by a limit along a non-principal ultrafilter, or the measure obtained by compactness in [0,1]P(G)[0,1]^{\mathcal{P}(G)}[0,1]P(G).

The converse — amenable implies Følner — is where the content is, and no averaging argument reaches it. One has to produce, from a mean, finite sets that are almost invariant; the passage runs through a separation theorem in ℓ1(G)\ell^1(G)ℓ1(G), the only step here needing a genuinely infinite-dimensional tool. The classical arguments provide no combinatorial route.

Two smaller obstructions are worth naming. Tarski's theorem — an invariant measure giving a set measure one exists precisely when that set is not paradoxical — is quoted without proof in the source and is the hardest single statement in the mission. And Theorem 2.6 rests on a finitely additive extension theorem for measures on a Boolean algebra, which is not the Carathéodory construction in Mathlib; Mathlib's is about outer measures and σ\sigmaσ-additivity.

Formalization scope

Amenability is IsAmenable G: the existence of m:P(G)→[0,∞]m : \mathcal{P}(G) \to [0,\infty]m:P(G)→[0,∞] with m(G)=1m(G) = 1m(G)=1, finitely additive on disjoint pairs, and invariant under left translation. The codomain is the extended nonnegative reals rather than [0,1][0,1][0,1], to match the conclusion of Mathlib's IsFoelner.amenable — which at X=GX = GX=G with every set measurable is exactly IsAmenable — so that theorem is directly usable; finite additivity and m(G)=1m(G) = 1m(G)=1 force m(s)≤1m(s) \le 1m(s)≤1 anyway, so nothing is added or lost.

Committed conventions. Means live on ℓ∞(G)\ell^\infty(G)ℓ∞(G), realised as lp (fun _ : G => ℝ) ∞ — not on all of G→RG \to \mathbb{R}G→R, where invariance and normalisation are already contradictory (proved for Z\mathbb{Z}Z), so every statement about means would be vacuously unprovable. Normalisation is phrased via constantly-111 functions, to avoid depending on the ring structure of ℓ∞\ell^\inftyℓ∞. Cardinalities use Set.ncard, so no DecidableEq instance propagates into the statements. Paradoxicality is defined for an arbitrary subset, recovering the source's whole-space notion as a special case, because the source states it for the whole space but uses it for subsets throughout. Equidecomposability builds on Mathlib's Equidecomp, and growth on the published Chou_Growth bundle, rather than either being redefined.

One trivialising formalization is ruled out: amenability requiring only m(G)=1m(G) = 1m(G)=1 and additivity, without invariance, is satisfied by any normalised counting density and would make the mission vacuous. Left-invariance is part of every definition here, and IsAmenable is exhibited non-vacuously for finite groups.

A complete development needs finitely additive measures on a power set, invariant means on ℓ∞\ell^\inftyℓ∞, the Følner condition and sequences, paradoxical decompositions, and a finitely additive extension theorem on a Boolean algebra; the definitions and the last of these are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome on any milestone. Proposition 2.2's closure properties are the most self-contained entry points, and Theorem 1.2 is the one Mathlib has explicitly asked for.

What is left out

Two bodies of material from the source are deliberately out of scope, left for later missions in this series.

The geometric construction of the Banach–Tarski paradox — that SO(3,R)SO(3,\mathbb{R})SO(3,R) contains a free group of rank two, the Hausdorff paradox, and the paradoxical decompositions of the sphere and the ball. This mission takes the measure-theoretic half of Section 1 and leaves the half about the 222-sphere. Tarski's theorem and the Banach–Schröder–Bernstein theorem are in scope despite being printed alongside that material, because both are equidecomposability combinatorics and both are needed by results that are in scope.

The Grigorchuk group — its construction on the binary rooted tree, the proof that it is amenable but not elementary amenable, and its subexponential growth. Theorem 4.2 and Theorem 4.3 are the exceptions, and they enter as references rather than targets.

Also out of scope: the locally compact case. The source gives most definitions for both discrete and locally compact groups, then says it will "mostly focus on discrete groups"; only the discrete case is formalized. Følner nets for uncountable groups are likewise omitted, as is the extension of Example 3.5 to finitely generated abelian groups, which the source leaves as an exercise.

Selected references

  • A. Garrido, An introduction to amenable groups, lecture notes, Oxford Advanced Class in Algebra, Michaelmas 2013. archived PDF
  • S. Banach and A. Tarski, Sur la décomposition des ensembles de points en parties respectivement congruentes, Fund. Math. 6 (1924), 244–277. DOI
  • J. von Neumann, Zur allgemeinen Theorie des Maßes, Fund. Math. 13 (1929), 73–116. DOI
  • M. M. Day, Amenable semigroups, Illinois J. Math. 1 (1957), 509–544. DOI
  • E. Følner, On groups with full Banach mean value, Math. Scand. 3 (1955), 243–254. DOI
  • I. Namioka, Følner's conditions for amenable semi-groups, Math. Scand. 15 (1964), 18–28 — the source of the argument for the goal theorem. DOI
  • J. M. Rosenblatt, Invariant measures and growth conditions, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 193 (1974), 33–53 — where supramenability is introduced. DOI
  • A. Yu. Ol'shanskii, On the problem of the existence of an invariant mean on a group, Russian Math. Surveys 35 (1980), 180–181 — the paper Grigorchuk credits for AG≠NFAG \neq NFAG=NF. DOI
  • C. Chou, Elementary amenable groups, Illinois J. Math. 24 (1980), 396–407. DOI
  • R. I. Grigorchuk, Degrees of growth of finitely generated groups, and the theory of invariant means, Math. USSR-Izvestiya 25 (1985), 259. DOI
  • S. Wagon, The Banach–Tarski Paradox, Cambridge University Press, 1985. DOI
37 thms1 active userReviewed
Probability·Captain: mikedeng1

Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence 18: Countable spin-flip systemsTextbook

Why infinite spin systems need a generation theorem

A spin-flip system models a countable collection of two-state components whose transition rates may depend on the entire current configuration. Such systems are basic examples of interacting particle processes: each local move is simple, but infinitely many possible moves may be active and their rates interact through the configuration. The central analytic question is whether the formal sum of local flip operators determines a genuine time evolution on continuous observables. Chapter 8, Section 3 of Stewart N. Ethier and Thomas G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, answers this question under uniform rate and influence bounds Ethier--Kurtz, Theorem 3.5.

This mission states that result without replacing the countable system by a finite-state chain or assuming finite total jump intensity. It also retains the theorem's cylinder-function core, which identifies finitely coordinate-dependent observables as a sufficient starting class for recovering the closed generator.

Configuration space and coordinate variation

Let S be a countable type of sites. A configuration is a function η : S → Bool; false and true relabel the source spins -1 and 1. The product topology on these configurations is the one induced by the discrete topology on each coordinate. The Lean space C(S → Bool, ℝ) consists of real-valued continuous observables on this compact product space and carries its uniform norm.

For a site i, spinFlip i η agrees with η away from i and negates the Boolean value at i. For an observable f, its coordinate variation at i is

var⁡i(f)=sup⁡η∣f(flip⁡iη)−f(η)∣.\operatorname{var}_i(f)=\sup_{\eta}\left|f(\operatorname{flip}_i\eta)-f(\eta)\right|.vari​(f)=ηsup​∣f(flipi​η)−f(η)∣.

The domain used in the theorem is the full class of continuous observables for which ∑ i, var_i(f) is summable. This is a one-coordinate variation domain: it measures the effect of changing one spin, rather than exchanging two occupied sites.

For every site i, the flip rate c i is itself a continuous function of the configuration. Rates are nonnegative and uniformly bounded in the uniform norm. Their dependence on other coordinates is controlled by a second uniform bound: for each i, the series ∑ j, var_j(c i) is summable, with a bound independent of i. These are the two clauses of equation (3.24).

Formalization target

The pre-generator graph implements equation (3.25). For every pair (f,g) in that graph, f has summable coordinate variation and

g(η)=∑ici(η)(f(flip⁡iη)−f(η)).g(\eta)=\sum_i c_i(\eta)\bigl(f(\operatorname{flip}_i\eta)-f(\eta)\bigr).g(η)=i∑​ci​(η)(f(flipi​η)−f(η)).

The goal is Theorem 3.5 in full. It asserts that every function in the prescribed domain has a continuous image in the graph; the closure of the graph in the product uniform-norm topology is single-valued; and that closure is exactly the generator graph of a strongly continuous contraction semigroup. The semigroup is positive and preserves the constant function one, giving the conservative Feller conclusion used by the source.

The final clause retains the source's cylinder core. Restrict the initial graph to functions depending on a finite set of coordinates, expressed by the existence of a finite set F such that agreement on F forces equal function values. The closure of this restricted graph equals the full generator graph. Generation and the core are kept together because both are conclusions of the same theorem.

Significance of the result

The result turns an infinite formal sum of local moves into a closed, single-valued Markov generator. This is stronger than merely defining the pointwise series: it supplies the strongly continuous positive contraction evolution, conservativity, and the derivative characterization of the entire generator domain. The cylinder-core clause means that finite-coordinate observables are graph-norm dense enough to recover that generator, even though the state space and the total collection of possible flips are countable.

The theorem is already proved in the source. The formalization target is its precise Lean statement, including the infinite-site domain, the uniform influence hypothesis, generator closure, and core. The reusable infrastructure consists of the book-wide strongly continuous contraction-semigroup predicate and the mission-local flip, variation, and graph definitions.

Where the analytic difficulty lies

The naive finite-rate jump argument does not apply. A uniform bound on each individual rate does not bound the sum of rates over a countably infinite site set, so the system may have infinite total potential flip intensity. Pointwise notation for the generator also does not by itself show that its image is continuous or that its graph closure is single-valued. The coordinate-influence bound and summable-variation domain are therefore essential parts of the target rather than optional regularity decoration.

The neighboring exclusion-process theorem is not interchangeable with this one. A spin flip changes one coordinate and permits creation or destruction of occupation, whereas exclusion dynamics exchanges two coordinates and conserves particle number. Their domains and rate conditions are correspondingly different.

Formalization scope

The Lean statement allows empty, finite, and countably infinite S; it does not impose nonemptiness or finiteness. Bool is an exact two-state relabeling, not a restriction to a special numerical spin convention. spinVariation uses a real supremum over the nonempty compact configuration space. Explicit Summable hypotheses prevent divergent real tsum expressions from receiving an unintended default interpretation.

The operator graph uses the actual pointwise series and requires a continuous output. Closure is taken in C(S → Bool, ℝ) × C(S → Bool, ℝ). The semigroup is indexed by real time, but every law and bound uses nonnegative times; negative-time values carry no mathematical requirement. No finite-total-rate hypothesis, finite-site approximation, two-site exchange dynamics, or weakened core statement is admitted.

Selected references

  • Stewart N. Ethier and Thomas G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, Wiley, 1986, Chapter 1, Section 3; Chapter 4; Chapter 8, Section 3, Theorem 3.5, equations (3.24)--(3.25), printed p. 381. Wiley DOI
5 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 9 of 10Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me